Toshiba Copier 310 User Manual
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION  
AND SERVICE FORTHE COPIER FC-210/310  
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.  
1. Transportation/Installation  
• When transporting/installing the copier, move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers.  
The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 187 kg (413 lb), therefore pay full attention  
when handling it.  
• Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V/20A (220V, 230V, 240V/10A) or more  
for its power source.  
• The copier must be grounded for safety.  
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.  
• Select a suitable place for installation.  
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.  
• Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone.  
• To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of  
80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear.  
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the copier and shall be easily accessible.  
2. Service of Machines  
• Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.  
• Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the  
damp heater and their periphery.  
• Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, high-voltage transformer,  
exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially,  
the board of these components should not be touched since the electirc charge may remain in  
the condensers, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.  
• Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.  
• Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges under-  
neath.  
• When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections  
and rotating/operating sections.Avoid exposure to laser radiation.  
• Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.  
• Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.  
− Avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
− Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.  
− Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. ERROR CODE AND SELF-  
DIAGNOSIS  
2. ADJUSTMENT  
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
(PM)  
4. TROUBLESHOOTING  
5. UPDATINGTHE FIRMWARE  
6. POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
7. WIRE HARNESS  
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
1. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS ................................................................................... 1-1  
1.1 Error Code List...................................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.2 Self-Diagnosis Mode ............................................................................................................. 1-6  
1.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) ..................................................................................... 1-8  
1.2.2 Output check (Test mode 03) .................................................................................. 1-15  
1.2.3 Test print mode (04) ................................................................................................. 1-19  
1.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ............................................................................................. 1-20  
1.2.5 Setting mode (08) .................................................................................................... 1-33  
2. ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................................................... 2-1  
2.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment) ...................................................................... 2-1  
2.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor..................................................................................... 2-2  
2.2.1 Automatic removing of developer material............................................................... 2-2  
2.2.2 Initialization of auto-toner sensor ............................................................................ 2-3  
2.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control ..................................................................................... 2-7  
2.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control................................................................................ 2-8  
2.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment.............................................................................................. 2-9  
2.5.1  
2.5.2  
2.5.3  
2.5.4  
Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the registration roller ............................................ 2-11  
Registration motor speed adjustment ........................................................................ 2-12  
Printer section related adjustment............................................................................. 2-13  
Scanner related adjustment ...................................................................................... 2-16  
2.6 Image Quality Adjustment...................................................................................................... 2-24  
2.6.1  
2.6.2  
2.6.3  
2.6.4  
2.6.5  
2.6.6  
2.6.7  
Automatic gamma adjustment .................................................................................. 2-24  
Density adjustment ................................................................................................... 2-25  
Color balance adjustment ......................................................................................... 2-26  
Offset adjustment for background processing ........................................................... 2-27  
Judgment threshold for ACS ..................................................................................... 2-27  
AI mode setting ........................................................................................................ 2-28  
Sharpness adjustment .............................................................................................. 2-39  
2.7 High-VoltageTransformer Settings.......................................................................................... 2-30  
2.7.1  
2.7.2  
2.7.3  
Overview .................................................................................................................. 2-30  
Settings after replacing main high-voltage transformers ............................................ 2-30  
Settings after replacing transfer transformer ............................................................. 2-31  
2.8 Adjustment of the Developer Unit........................................................................................... 2-32  
2.8.1 Doctor-to-Sleeve Gap ............................................................................................... 2-32  
2.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section........................................................................................ 2-33  
2.9.1  
2.9.2  
Carriages .................................................................................................................. 2-33  
Lens unit................................................................................................................... 2-37  
2.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System .............................................................................. 2-39  
2.10.1 Cassette sidewise deviation ..................................................................................... 2-39  
2.11 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) .......................................................................................... 2-40  
FC-210/310 CONTENTS  
I
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) ........................................................................................ 3-1  
3.1 Types of Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................................... 3-1  
3.2 Outline of the Maintenance Order ......................................................................................... 3-2  
3.3 Preventive Maintenance Checklist........................................................................................ 3-2  
3.4 PM Kit ................................................................................................................................... 3-11  
3.5 List of Adjustment Tools ........................................................................................................ 3-12  
3.6 Precautions for Storing/Handling Supplies and Parts ........................................................... 3-13  
3.6.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies .............................................................. 3-13  
3.6.2 Checking and cleaning of the photoconductive drum .............................................. 3-13  
3.6.3 Checking and cleaning of the drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade .... 3-15  
3.6.4 Checking and replacing the transfer belt ................................................................. 3-15  
3.6.5  
3.6.6  
3.6.7  
Checking and replacing the transfer roller and fuser roller ......................................... 3-15  
Checking and cleaning of the fuser belt and lower heat roller .................................... 3-15  
Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller ............................................ 3-16  
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code .................................................................. 4-1  
4.1.1  
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
4.1.4  
4.1.5  
4.1.6  
4.1.7  
4.1.8  
4.1.9  
Paper transport jam inside the copier ........................................................................ 4-1  
Paper feeding jam ..................................................................................................... 4-4  
Paper transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor after feeding) .......... 4-6  
Cover open jam ........................................................................................................ 4-7  
Paper jam in ADU and reversing area........................................................................ 4-9  
Original jam in the RADF .......................................................................................... 4-10  
Paper jam in the finisher ........................................................................................... 4-12  
Special sheet jam ..................................................................................................... 4-20  
Drive system related service call .............................................................................. 4-21  
4.1.10 Paper feeding system related service call ................................................................. 4-23  
4.1.11 Scanner related service call ...................................................................................... 4-25  
4.1.12 Copy process related service call ............................................................................. 4-26  
4.1.13 Fuser unit related service call ................................................................................... 4-29  
4.1.14 Communications related service call......................................................................... 4-31  
4.1.15 ADF related service call............................................................................................ 4-32  
4.1.16 Other service call (1) ................................................................................................ 4-33  
4.1.17 Laser optical unit related service call ........................................................................ 4-34  
4.1.18 Finisher related service call ...................................................................................... 4-36  
4.1.19 Image quality related service call.............................................................................. 4-54  
4.1.20 Other service call (2) ................................................................................................ 4-62  
4.1.21 Image processing related service call ....................................................................... 4-63  
4.2 Troubleshooting of Image ....................................................................................................... 4-64  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
II  
FC-210/310 CONTENTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. UPDATINGTHE FIRMWARE ...................................................................................................... 5-1  
5.1 Installing Software for Firmware Update ................................................................................. 5-2  
5.1.1  
5.1.2  
5.1.3  
5.1.4  
5.1.5  
5.1.6  
Outline ...................................................................................................................... 5-2  
Requirements ........................................................................................................... 5-2  
Dial-up networking function ....................................................................................... 5-4  
Installing dial-up networking ...................................................................................... 5-8  
Setting dial-up networking ......................................................................................... 5-10  
Installing software for FTP server ............................................................................. 5-14  
5.2 Operation Procedure in [3][9] Mode........................................................................................ 5-18  
5.2.1  
5.2.2  
5.2.3  
5.2.4  
Outline ...................................................................................................................... 5-18  
Preparation ............................................................................................................... 5-18  
Updating firmware ..................................................................................................... 5-20  
Display ..................................................................................................................... 5-28  
5.3 Updating the Firmware Using the Downloading Jig ................................................................. 5-32  
5.3.1  
5.3.2  
System firmware....................................................................................................... 5-33  
Engine firmware ........................................................................................................ 5-39  
6. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ........................................................................................................6-1  
6.1 Output Channel ...................................................................................................................... 6-1  
7. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................................7-1  
7.1 ACWire Harness ................................................................................................................... 7-2  
7.2 DCWire Harness ..........................................................................................................Appendix  
<Appendix> SPECIFICATIONS · ACCESSORIES · OPTIONS · SUPPLIES ................................ A-1  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Specifications ........................................................................................................................ A-1  
Accessories ........................................................................................................................... A-5  
Options .................................................................................................................................. A-6  
Replacement Units/Supplies .................................................................................................. A-6  
System List ........................................................................................................................... A-7  
FC-210/310 CONTENTS  
III  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In this manual, colors are sometimes described using abbreviations as listed below:  
Yellow :Y Magenta : M Cyan : C Black : K  
1. ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1.1 Error Code List  
While the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL SERVICE”symbol is flashing, pressing the [CLEAR] key and the  
digital key [8] at the same time shows one of the following error codes on the copy-quantity indicator as  
long as those keys are pressed.  
Classification  
Paper transport jam  
Error code  
E01  
E02  
E03  
EB7  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
E16  
E19  
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E45  
E46  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E54  
Contents  
Paper leading edge not reaching the exit sensor  
Paper trailing edge not passing the exit sensor  
Paper remaining inside the copier at power ON  
Restart time-out error  
inside the copier  
Paper feeding jam  
Paper misfeed from the ADU  
Paper misfeed from the bypass tray  
Paper misfeed from the 1st cassette  
Paper misfeed from the 2nd cassette  
Paper misfeed from the 3rd cassette  
Paper misfeed from the 4th cassette  
Paper misfeed from the LCF  
Paper transport jam  
Paper transport jam from the LCF  
Paper transport jam from the 1st cassette  
Paper transport jam from the 2nd cassette  
Paper transport jam from the 3rd cassette  
Paper transport jam from the 4th cassette  
Paper transport jam from the bypass tray  
Front cover opened during printing  
Side door opened during printing  
ADU pulled out during printing  
(Paper not reaching the registration  
sensor after feeding)  
Cover open jam  
LCF jam access cover opened during printing  
Bypass unit opened during printing  
Paper not reaching the ADU  
Paper transport jam in the ADU and  
reversing area  
Paper not reaching the ADU stack  
Paper not reaching the ADU path sensor  
ADU paper transport jam  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 1  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
E71  
Contents  
Original not reaching the aligning sensor  
Original not reaching the exit sensor  
Original not passing the exit sensor  
Punching jam  
Original jam in the ADF  
E72  
E73  
Paper jam in the finisher  
E9F  
EA1  
EA2  
EA3  
EA4  
EA5  
EA6  
EA8  
EA9  
EAA  
EAB  
EAC  
EAE  
EC2  
EC3  
C05  
C06  
C0A  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C18  
C27  
C28  
C29  
Paper transport delay jam  
Paper transport stop jam  
Paper remaining inside the finisher at power ON  
Finisher front door opened during printing  
Finisher stapling jam  
Finisher early arrival jam  
Saddle stitcher stapling jam  
Saddle stitcher front door opened during printing  
Paper remaining in the saddle stitcher at power ON  
Saddle stitcher transport stop jam  
Saddle stitcher transport delay jam  
Finisher receive time-out jam  
Special sheet jam  
OHP film jams when not fed from bypass tray or 2nd cassette  
OHP film used in non-OHP mode  
Drive system related service call  
ADU motor rotation abnormal  
Feed motor rotation abnormal  
Developer motor rotation abnormal  
ADU paper side guide operation abnormal  
ADU paper end guide operation abnormal  
1st cassette tray operation abnormal  
2nd cassette tray operation abnormal  
3rd cassette tray operation abnormal  
4th cassette tray operation abnormal  
LCF tray operation abnormal  
Paper feeding system related  
service call  
Scanner related service call  
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a fixed time  
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a fixed time  
Exposure lamp disconnection detected  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
C31  
Contents  
Used toner transport motor rotation abnormal  
Developer removal shutter abnormal  
Transfer belt unit contact/release operation abnormal  
Auto-toner error (K)  
Copy process related service call  
C33  
C35  
C38  
C39  
Auto-toner error (C)  
C3A  
C3B  
C3C  
C3D  
C3E  
C3F  
Auto-toner error (M)  
Auto-toner error (Y)  
Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (K)  
Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (C)  
Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (M)  
Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (Y)  
Thermistor or heater abnormal when warming-up is started  
Thermistor abnormal after the copier has become ready  
Thermistor abnormal during warming-up after abnormality  
judgment  
Fuser unit related service call  
C41  
C42  
C43  
C44  
C46  
C47  
Heater abnormal during warming-up after abnormality  
judgment  
Heater abnormal (low temperature) after the copier has  
become ready  
Rear thermistor abnormal after the copier has become  
ready  
C48  
C7  
Heater abnormal (high temperature)  
Error C7  
Communications related service call  
C57  
C5A  
C5B  
C5C  
C72  
C73  
C74  
C94  
C9A  
C9B  
C9D  
C9E  
Communications error between LGC-CPU and IPC board  
Communications error between LGC-CPU and printer controller  
LGC-CPU signal transmission error to IMC-CPU  
LGC-CPU signal reception error from IMC-CPU  
Aligning sensor automatic adjustment error  
EEPROM initializing error  
ADF related service call  
Other service call (1)  
Paper exit sensor automatic adjustment error  
LGC-CPU abnormal  
Main memory abnormal  
LGC-CPU protocol abnormal  
IMC-CPU protocol abnormal  
IMC board connection abnormal  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 3  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Classification  
Error code  
CA1  
CA2  
CD1  
CD2  
CD3  
CD4  
CB1  
CB2  
CB3  
CB4  
CB5  
CB6  
CB7  
CB8  
CB9  
CBA  
CBB  
CBC  
CBD  
CBE  
CBF  
CD5  
CD6  
CD7  
CD9  
CDA  
CDB  
CE1  
CE2  
CE4  
CE5  
CE6  
CE9  
CF1  
F07  
Contents  
Polygonal motor rotation abnormal  
H-SYNC abnormal  
Laser optical unit related service call  
Laser calibration error (K)  
Laser calibration error (C)  
Laser calibration error (M)  
Laser calibration error (Y)  
Finisher related service call  
Feed motor abnormal  
Delivery motor abnormal  
Tray lift motor abnormal  
Alignment motor abnormal  
Staple motor abnormal  
Stapler shift motor abnormal  
Height sensor abnormal  
Backup RAM data abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/paper pushing plate motor abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/stitcher motor (front) abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/stitcher motor (rear) abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/alignment motor abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/guide motor abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/paper folding motor abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/paper positioning plate motor abnormal  
Saddle stitcher/sensor connector connection error  
Saddle stitcher/microswitch abnormal  
Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher  
Swing motor abnormal  
Horizontal registration motor abnormal  
Punch motor abnormal  
Image quality related service call  
Image quality sensor abnormal (OFF level)  
Image quality sensor abnormal (no pattern level)  
Image quality control test pattern abnormal  
Temperature/humidity sensor upper-limit abnormal  
Drum thermistor abnormal (Y)  
Drum thermistor abnormal (K)  
Color registration control abnormal  
Communications error between system-CPU and LGC-CPU  
Communications error between system-CPU and scanner-CPU  
HDD formatting error  
Other service call (2)  
F09  
F10  
F11  
Communications error between system-CPU and scanner-CPU  
Communications error between system-CPU and scanner-CPU  
Communications error between system-CPU and AI board  
during pre-scanning  
F12  
Image processing related service  
call  
F51  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<Error history>>  
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.  
Display example  
EA1  
01 08 26 17 57 32  
YY MM DD HH MM SS  
12 digits (Year is indicated  
with its last two digits.)  
64  
64  
236210000000  
ABCDEFHIJLOP  
12 digits  
Error code  
3 digits  
MMM  
3 digits  
NNN  
3 digits  
A
B
C
Paper source  
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: 1st 4: 2nd 5: 3rd 6: 4th 7: ADU feed  
Paper size code  
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV  
9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Card Z: Not selected  
Sort mode / staple mode  
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple  
8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch  
ADF mode  
D
E
F
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED  
APS / AMS mode  
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS  
Duplex mode  
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Two-sided / Single-sided 4: Two-sided / Duplexed  
8: Single-sided / Duplexed  
Unused  
G
H
Image shift  
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right  
I
Editing  
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative / Positive  
J
Edge erase / Dual-page  
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page  
K
L
Unused  
Function  
0: Copying 1: Unused 2: Unused 3: Unused 4: Printing 5: Unused  
MMM  
NNN  
O
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)  
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M  
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)  
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N  
Color mode  
0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Monocolor  
P
AI board  
0: Unused 1: Used  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 5  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2 Self-Diagnosis Mode  
Mode  
Starting  
Contents  
Exit  
Control panel check  
mode  
[0]+[1]+[POWER]  
All control panel LEDs are lit,  
and all LCD pixels are turned  
ON/OFF repeatedly.  
[CLEAR] or  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
Test mode  
[0]+[3]+[POWER]  
[0]+[4]+[POWER]  
[0]+[5]+[POWER]  
[0]+[8]+[POWER]  
Input/output signals are checked. [POWER]OFF/ON  
Test print mode  
Adjustment mode  
Setting mode  
A test pattern print is made.  
Adjustment of various items  
Setting of various items  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
List printing mode  
[9]+[START]+[POWER] Printing of list of 05 and 08 code [POWER]OFF/ON  
data  
Note: Starting for various modes:  
While pressing simultaneously the two digital keys corresponding to the mode you want to set  
(for example, [0] and [5]), turn ON the main switch [POWER].  
<Operation procedure>  
• Control panel check mode (01) :  
CLEAR  
(Exit)  
POWER OFF/ON  
or  
0
1
START  
START  
CLEAR  
(Exit)  
(LEDs light/LCD flashes)  
(Check Keys)  
Power  
Notes: 1. During the “Check keys” state, [CLEAR] alone can exit.  
During the “LEDs light/LCD flashes” state, [CLEAR] can clear the mode.  
2. Check keys :  
Any key with LED (when it is pressed, the LED goes out.)  
Any key without LED (when it is pressed, an indication is displayed in the message area.)  
• Test mode (03)  
: Refer to "1.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)" and "1.2.2 Output check  
(Test mode 03)".  
• Test print mode (04) : Refer to "1.2.3 Test print mode (04)".  
• Adjustment mode (05) : Refer to "1.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)".  
• Setting mode (08)  
: Refer to "1.2.5 Setting mode (08)".  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• List printing mode  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
9
START  
START  
(Code)  
(Operation is started)  
POWER  
101: Adjustment mode (05)  
102: Setting mode (08)  
Normal  
[POWER] ON  
[0][3]  
[0][1]  
[0][4]  
[0][5]  
[0][8]  
[9][START]  
*1  
[CLEAR]  
Control panel  
check mode  
Warming up  
Standby  
Test mode  
Test print mode Adjustment mode  
Setting mode  
List printing mode  
[POWER]OFF/ON  
*2  
Hand over to user  
Transition diagram of self-diagnosis mode conditions  
*1 : During the activation of the “Control panel check mode”, copying is not possible. But after pressing  
[CLEAR] to make the copier ready, you can make copies.  
*2 : After having used the self-diagnosis mode, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the power before return-  
ing the copier to the customer.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 7  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 1 Input check (Test mode 03)  
The status of each item can be checked by setting ON/OFF of each [FULL COLOR], [AUTO COLOR],  
[ENERGY SAVER], and then pressing each of the corresponding digital key in this test mode 03.  
Note: When icon is displayed with black letter on white background, it indicates the value is 0, while in  
reverse black and white, it indicates the value is 1.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: OFF, [ENERGY SAVER]key: OFF  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
—
—
—
D
—
[1]  
E
1st cassette paper-empty sensor  
1: No paper  
F
G
H
A
B
C
1st cassette tray-up limit sensor  
1: Tray is upper limit.  
1: Paper present  
1: No cassette  
1st cassette feed-jam sensor  
1st cassette detection switch  
—
—
—
D
—
[2]  
E
2nd cassette paper-empty sensor  
1: No paper  
F
G
H
A
B
C
2nd cassette tray-up limit sensor  
1: Tray is upper limit.  
1: Paper present  
1: No cassette  
2nd cassette feed-jam sensor  
2nd cassette detection switch  
—
—
—
D
—
3rd cassette paper-empty sensor  
3rd cassette tray-up limit sensor  
3rd cassette feed-jam sensor  
3rd cassette detection switch  
—
[3]  
E
1: No paper  
F
G
H
A
B
C
1: Tray is upper limit.  
1: Paper present  
1: No cassette  
—
—
D
—
[4]  
E
4th cassette paper-empty sensor  
4th cassette tray-up limit sensor  
4th cassette feed-jam sensor  
4th cassette detection switch  
1: No paper  
F
G
H
1: Tray is upper limit.  
1: Paper present  
1: No cassette  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 8  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Bypass paper-width sensor 0  
Bypass paper-width sensor 1  
Bypass paper-width sensor 2  
—
Condition  
Refer to Table 1.  
A
B
C
Refer to Table 1.  
Refer to Table 1.  
D
[5]  
E
Bypass paper sensor  
Bypass unit open/close switch  
Side door open/close switch  
Bypass unit is installed or not  
LCF paper-empty sensor  
LCF lower-limit sensor  
LCF tray-up sensor  
1: No paper  
F
G
H
A
B
C
1: Unit is opened.  
1: Side door is opened.  
0: Unit is installed.  
1: No paper  
1: Tray limit (lower)  
1: Tray limit (upper)  
0: Switch is ON.  
D
LCF tray-down switch  
LCF paper supply door sensor  
LCF is installed or not  
ADU motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating by output check 03)  
ADU is installed or not  
ADU paper-jam sensor  
ADU paper-empty sensor  
ADU end switch  
[6]  
E
1: Door is opened.  
0: LCF is installed.  
0: Normal rotation  
F
G
H
A
B
C
0: ADU is installed.  
1: Paper present  
0: No paper  
1: End guide is at home position.  
1: Side guide is at home position.  
D
ADU side switch  
[7]  
E
—
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
—
Key copy counter is installed or not  
—
0: Key copy counter is installed.  
0: Shutter is at closed position.  
0: Unit is installed.  
Developer removal shutter home position sensor  
—
Transfer belt unit is installed or not  
—
E
—
[8]  
F
Developer motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating by output check 03)  
Transfer belt limit switch  
Transfer belt home position switch  
0: Normal rotation  
G
H
0:Transfer belt is in black mode position.  
0:Transfer belt is in color mode position.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 9  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
External printer controller power ON/OFF  
0: Controller power ON  
—
—
D
Front cover switch  
1: Front cover is opened.  
[9]  
E
OHP sensor  
0: Opaque paper is installed.  
F
G
H
A
B
C
—
Registration sensor  
1 : Paper present  
0: Board is installed.  
1: Paper present  
IPC board (Finisher installation kit) is installed or not  
ADU path sensor  
—
Exit sensor  
1: Paper present  
D
Paper-exit unit open/close switch  
1: Paper-exit unit is opened.  
1: Used toner full  
[0]  
E
Toner bag limit sensor  
F
G
H
—
—
—
Table 1. Relation between bypass paper-width sensor status and paper-width size.  
Bypass paper-width sensor  
Paper-width size  
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
A3/LD  
A4-R/LT-R  
A5-R/ST-R  
Card size  
B4/LG  
B5-R  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 10  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: OFF, [ENERGY SAVER]key: ON  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
—
—
—
D
—
[1]  
E
—
F
G
H
A
B
C
—
—
—
Developer cartridge Y is installed or not  
0: Cartirdge is installed.  
0: Cartirdge is installed.  
0: Cartirdge is installed.  
0: Cartirdge is installed.  
0: Unit is installed.  
Developer cartridge M is installed or not  
Developer cartridge C is installed or not  
D
Developer cartridge K is installed or not  
[2]  
E
Processing unit is installed or not  
F
G
H
A
B
C
Fuser unit is installed or not  
0: Unit is installed.  
—
—
Wire cleaner home position switch Y  
0: Cleaning pad is at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at home position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at limit position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at limit position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at limit position.  
0: Cleaning pad is at limit position.  
Wire cleaner home position switch M  
Wire cleaner home position switch C  
D
Wire cleaner home position switch K  
[3]  
E
Wire cleaner limit switch Y  
F
G
H
A
B
C
Wire cleaner limit switch M  
Wire cleaner limit switch C  
Wire cleaner limit switch K  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
D
[4]  
E
F
G
H
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 11  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
A
B
C
—
—
—
D
—
[5]  
E
—
F
G
H
A
B
C
—
—
—
—
—
—
D
—
—
[6]  
E
F
G
H
—
Front cover, paper-exit unit open/close check  
Polygonal motor rotation status  
(Motor is rotating by output check 03)  
—
1: Cover/unit is opened.  
0: Normal rotation  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[0]  
—
—
—
—
Upper heat roller thermistor (center) check  
Upper heat roller thermistor (rear) check  
Lower heat roller thermistor (center) check  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: ON, [ENERGY SAVER]key: OFF  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[0]  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Lower heat roller thermistor (rear) check  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Temperature sensor check  
Humidity sensor check  
Drum thermistor Y check  
—
—
Drum thermistor K check  
Thermistor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
—
—
—
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 12  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FULL COLOR]key: OFF, [AUTO COLOR]key: ON, [ENERGY SAVER]key: ON  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
[1]  
[2]  
—
—
—
Color registration sensor (front)  
"0" is displayed with reflection at  
transfer belt.  
(Sensor LED is turned ON by output check 03.)  
[3]  
—
Color registration sensor (rear)  
"0" is displayed with reflection at  
transfer belt.  
(Sensor LED is turned ON by output check 03.)  
[4]  
[5]  
—
—
A
Image quality sensor  
Sensor output value is displayed with 10 bits.  
—
ADF aligning sensor  
1: Original present  
1: Original present  
1: ADF is opened.  
1: Original present  
B
ADF exit sensor  
C
D
E
ADF open/close sensor  
ADF empty sensor  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
ADF size sensor 1  
F
—
G
H
A
ADF size sensor 2  
ADF unit is installed or not  
1: ADF unit is installed.  
—
B
—
C
D
E
—
—
—
F
Carriage home position sensor  
1: Carriages are at home position.  
1: Platen cover is closed.  
G
H
A
—
Platen sensor  
—
—
B
C
D
E
—
APS sensor (APS-R)  
APS sensor (APS-C)  
APS sensor (APS-3)  
APS sensor (APS-2) (for A4 series)  
APS sensor (APS-1)  
SCM board input 24V check  
—
1: Original present  
1: Original present  
F
1: Original present  
G
H
—
—
1: Original present  
1: Original present  
[9]  
[0]  
Output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 13  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[FULL COLOR]key: ON, [AUTO COLOR]key: OFF, [ENERGY SAVER]key: OFF  
Digital key Icon  
Item  
Condition  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[0]  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Auto-toner sensor Y  
Auto-toner sensor M  
Auto-toner sensor C  
Auto-toner sensor K  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
Sensor output value is displayed with 8 bits.  
—
—
—
—
—
—
<Operation procedure>  
0
3
)
(
START  
FULL COLOR  
ENERGY SAVER  
Digital keys  
(LCD ON)  
AUTO COLOR  
POWER  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Note: After initialization, the copier goes into the test mode.  
Note: When icon is displayed with white letter on black background on the control  
panel, it indicates the value is 1.  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 14  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 2 Output check (Test mode 03)  
Output signal status can be checked by entering the following code in the test mode 03.  
Code  
Function  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
150 All output OFF  
1
1
101 Drum motor and transfer belt motor rotation  
with normal printing speed ON  
151 Code No. 101 function OFF  
102 Drum motor and transfer belt motor rotation  
with OHP printing speed (low) ON  
103 Paper feed motor ON  
152 Code No. 102 function OFF  
1
153 Code No. 103 function OFF  
154 Code No. 104 function OFF  
155 Code No. 105 function OFF  
156 Code No. 106 function OFF  
157 Code No. 107 function OFF  
158 Code No. 108 function OFF  
159 Code No. 109 function OFF  
160 Code No. 110 function OFF  
161 Code No. 111 function OFF  
162 Code No. 112 function OFF  
163 Code No. 113 function OFF  
164 Code No. 114 function OFF  
180 Code No. 130 function OFF  
181 Code No. 131 function OFF  
182 Code No. 132 function OFF  
183 Code No. 133 function OFF  
184 Code No. 134 function OFF  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
104 Fuser motor ON  
105 Developer motor (color mode) ON  
106 Developer motor (black mode) ON  
107 Registration motor ON  
108 Used toner transport motor ON  
109 ADU motor ON  
110 Toner motor Y ON  
111 Toner motor M ON  
112 Toner motor C ON  
113 Toner motor K ON  
114 Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON  
130 Polygonal motor standby speed ON  
131 Polygonal motor normal speed ON  
132 Image quality sensor LED ON  
133 Color registration sensor LED (front) ON  
134 Color registration sensor LED (rear) ON  
135 Image quality sensor mode switching ON (Black mode) 185 CodeNo.135functionOFF(Colormode)  
201 1st cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
202 2nd cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
203 3rd cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
204 4th cassette feed clutch ON/OFF  
205 Feed path clutch ON/OFF  
206 Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF  
207 1st cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
208 2nd cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
209 3rd cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
210 4th cassette tray-up motor ON (tray goes up)  
211 Paper-exit gate solenoid ON/OFF  
213 Ozone exhaust fan motor ON/OFF  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 15  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
214 Fuser exhaust fan motor Low/High speed  
215 PC board cooling fan motor ON/OFF  
216 Wire cleaner drive motor Y CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
217 Wire cleaner drive motor M CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
218 Wire cleaner drive motor C CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
219 Wire cleaner drive motor K CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
220 Transfer belt contact/release motor CW/CCW (continuous reciprocating)  
223 LCF paper feed motor ON/OFF  
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
224 LCF tray motor ON/OFF  
225 ADU feed clutch ON/OFF  
226 ADU gate solenoid ON/OFF  
227 ADU side motor ON/OFF  
228 ADU end motor ON/OFF  
229 Pre-feed clutch (front) ON/OFF  
230 Pre-feed clutch (rear) ON/OFF  
235 Main charger Y ON/OFF  
236 Main charger M ON/OFF  
237 Main charger C ON/OFF  
238 Main charger K ON/OFF  
243 Developer bias (Y) DC(-) ON/OFF  
244 Developer bias (M) DC(-) ON/OFF  
245 Developer bias (C) DC(-) ON/OFF  
246 Developer bias (K) DC(-) ON/OFF  
247 Developer bias (Y) AC ON/OFF  
248 Developer bias (M) AC ON/OFF  
249 Developer bias (C) AC ON/OFF  
250 Developer bias (K) AC ON/OFF  
251 Cleaning blade bias (Y) DC ON/OFF  
252 Cleaning blade bias (M) DC ON/OFF  
253 Cleaning blade bias (C) DC ON/OFF  
254 Cleaning blade bias (K) DC ON/OFF  
255 Transfer roller bias (Y) ON/OFF  
256 Transfer roller bias (M) ON/OFF  
257 Transfer roller bias (C) ON/OFF  
258 Transfer roller bias (K) ON/OFF  
259 Suction charger ON/OFF  
260 Discharge lamp Y ON/OFF  
261 Discharge lamp M ON/OFF  
262 Discharge lamp C ON/OFF  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 16  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Code  
Function  
Procedure  
263 Discharge lamp K ON/OFF  
280 Laser (Y) ON/OFF  
281 Laser (M) ON/OFF  
282 Laser (C) ON/OFF  
283 Laser (K) ON/OFF  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
300 Carriage fan motor rotation at standby speed (high speed) ON/OFF  
301 Carriage fan motor rotation at normal speed (low speed) ON/OFF  
302 SCM fan motor Low/High speed  
304 Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF  
331 ADF pick-up roller rotation ON/OFF  
332 ADF aligning roller rotation ON/OFF  
333 ADF transport belt CW rotation ON/OFF  
334 ADF transport belt CCW rotation ON/OFF  
351 Scan motor (carriages reciprocating once)  
352 Document motor (indicator reciprocating once)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 17  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Operation procedure>  
Procedure 1  
0
3
START  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Operation ON)  
(Code)  
(Operation OFF)  
POWER  
Procedure 2  
0
3
START  
CLEAR  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(One-direction operation)  
POWER  
Procedure 3  
0
3
START  
START  
CLEAR  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Operation ON)  
(Operation OFF)  
POWER  
Procedure 4  
0
3
START  
CLEAR  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Operation ON)  
(Operation OFF)  
POWER  
or  
6 sec. later  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 18  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 3 Test print mode (04)  
In the test print mode (04), you can print each test pattern by entering its corresponding code as  
follows.  
Code  
14  
Types of test pattern  
Gamma table check pattern  
Remarks  
Papersize  
A3/LD  
A3/LD  
To check gradation  
204 Grid pattern (Printer reproduction ratio/Registration  
adjustment pattern)  
Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 5mm  
(same as the grid pattern printed  
by adjustment mode  
[1]  
[PRINTER/NETWORK])  
219 6% test pattern  
A4/LT  
A4/LT  
A3/LD  
220 8% test pattern  
230 Gradation check pattern (2 pixels standard)  
Pattern width: 10mm,  
32 gradation steps  
Pattern width: 10mm,  
32 gradation steps  
231 Gradation check pattern (3 pixels standard)  
A3/LD  
234 Halftone  
A3/LD  
A3/LD  
270 Image quality control test patten  
To check image quality control  
Note: Full color (YMCK) mode is not available in 230, 231 and 234.  
<Operation procedure>  
0
4
(Continuous test  
print operation)  
START  
STOP  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
POWER  
Notes:1. When an error has occurred, it is indicated, but the recovery operation is not performed. So, turn the  
power OFF and then back ON to clear the error.  
2. During test printing, when "Wait adding toner" is displayed, the [STOP] key is disabled.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 19  
FC-210/310 ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 4 Adjustment mode (05)  
In the adjustment mode (05), the following adjustment items can be corrected, changed or checked.  
*The numbers after hyphens under the code columns stand for sub-codes.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
dure  
104 Reproduction ratio adjustment of  
secondary-scanning direction  
(scanner section)  
128 1~255 When the value increases by 1, the re-  
production ratio in the secondary-scan-  
ning direction (vertical paper feeding di-  
rection) increases by approx. 0.1522%.  
128 85~171 When the value increases by 1, the  
image shifts by approx. 0.1213mm to-  
ward the trailing edge of the paper.  
1
105 Image location adjustment of  
secondary-scanning direction  
(scanner section)  
1
1
1
106 Image location  
For regular  
180 5~251 When the value increases by 1, the  
image shifts by approx. 0.042mm toward  
the front side of the paper (machine).  
133 5~251 When you enter a value,which is 47  
steps (equivalent to 2mm) smaller than  
the set value of [106], the rear original  
edge and the front copy edge match  
adjustment of prima- copy mode  
ry-scanning direction  
108 (scanner section)  
For full image  
copy mode  
(0.042mm/step).  
135 RADF  
original stop position  
single-sided  
two-sided  
8
8
–
0~15 Changes the position where the original  
stops. When the value increases by 1,  
0~15 the original stop position shifts by 1mm  
away from the original scale.  
1
1
6
136  
137 RADF sensor automatic adjustment  
and EEPROM initialization  
–
By pressing the START key, WAIT is dis-  
played while the automatic adjustment  
is performed. This adjustment should be  
carried out when EEPROM, RADF PC  
board or sensors are replaced.  
200 Automatic filling of  
201 developer material  
202 and automatic ad-  
203 justment of the auto-  
204 toner sensor  
All (Y, M, C, K)  
–
–
–
–
–
0~255 Fills the developer from the developer  
0~255 cartridge (about 3 min.) and then adjusts  
0~255 the auto-toner sensor output to set in the  
0~255 range of 3.50~4.50V (about 2 min.).  
0~255 (As the value increases, the sensor out-  
put increases correspondingly.)  
5
5
5
5
5
Y
M
C
K
213 Display of auto-toner sensor output  
0
0~1023 Displays the auto-toner sensor output  
value.  
10  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 20  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
221 Automatic filling of  
developer material  
and automatic ad-  
justment of the auto-  
toner sensor  
Color (Y, M, C)  
–
0~255 Fills the developer from the developer  
cartridge (about 3 min.) and then adjusts  
the auto-toner sensor output to set in the  
range of 3.50~4.50V (about 2 min.).  
(As the value increases, the sensor out-  
put increases correspondingly.)  
5
223 Developer bias DC (–)  
Y
136 0~255 As the value increases, the transformer  
136 0~255 output increases. The adjustment value  
136 0~255 becomes effective only when the setting  
136 0~255 mode (08-400,401,409) is 0 (disabled).  
120 0~255 As the value increases, the transformer  
120 0~255 output increases. The adjustment value  
120 0~255 becomes effective only when the setting  
120 0~255 mode (08-400,401,409) is 0 (disabled).  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
224 output adjustment  
M
225  
C
226  
K
241 Main charger grid bias  
Y
242 output adjustment  
M
243  
C
244  
K
245 Automatic adjust-  
All (Y,M,C,K)  
–
–
–
–
–
–
0~255 Auto-toner sensor output is adjusted  
0~255 to set the output range within 3.50~  
0~255 4.50V automatically (about 2 min.). As  
0~255 the value increases, the sensor ouptut  
0~255 increases correspondingly.) (No deve-  
0~255 loper filling is carried out.)  
246 ment of the auto-  
Y
247 toner sensor  
M
248  
C
249  
K
250  
Color (Y,M,C)  
Y
252-0 Main charger bias  
250 0~999 Actual output voltage of main charger  
250 0~999 grid bias. After replacing the main high-  
250 0~999 voltage transformer, enter the value ac-  
250 0~999 cording to the supplementary data sheet.  
900 0~999  
252-1 output voltage 1 (lower)  
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
252-2  
252-3  
253-0 Main charger bias  
253-1 output voltage 2 (upper)  
900 0~999  
253-2  
900 0~999  
253-3  
900 0~999  
257-0 Developer bias DC(-)  
100 0~999 Actual output voltage of the developer  
100 0~999 bias. After replacing the main high-  
100 0~999 voltage transformer, enter the value ac-  
100 0~999 cording to the supplementary data sheet.  
700 0~999  
257-1 output voltage 1 (lower)  
257-2  
257-3  
258-0 Developer bias DC(-)  
258-1 output voltage 2 (upper)  
700 0~999  
258-2  
258-3  
700 0~999  
700 0~999  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 21  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
318 Transfer bias  
Normal paper  
mode / Thin  
paper mode  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
59 0~255 The bias value of the transfer roller is  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
319 output adjust-  
59 0~255 set. The higher the value, the larger the  
320 ment  
59 0~255 transformer output becomes. The adjust-  
321 (Full color)  
59 0~255 ment value becomes effective only when  
326  
Thick paper  
mode  
1
59 0~255 the setting mode (08-400,401,409)is 0  
327  
59 0~255 (disabled).  
59 0~255  
328  
329  
59 0~255  
330  
OHP mode  
59 0~255  
331  
99 0~255  
332  
109 0~255  
139 0~255  
69 0~255  
333  
334  
Thick paper 2  
mode  
335  
69 0~255  
336  
69 0~255  
337  
69 0~255  
356-0 Transfer bias  
356-1 offset adjust-  
356-2 ment  
356-3  
357-0  
357-1  
357-2  
357-3  
358-0  
358-1  
358-2  
358-3  
359-0  
359-1  
359-2  
359-3  
360-0  
360-1  
360-2  
360-3  
Normal paper  
mode / Thin  
paper mode  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0~8 The offset value of the transfer bias is  
0~8 set.  
0~8 0: -400V 1: -300V 2: -200V  
0~8 3: -100V 4: 0V  
5: +100V  
Thick paper  
mode  
1
0~8 6: +200V 7: +300V 8: +400V  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
0~8  
Thick paper 2  
mode  
Thick paper 3  
mode  
OHP mode  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 22  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
361 Transfer bias  
output adjust-  
ment (Black)  
363  
Normal paper  
mode / Thin  
paper mode  
Thick paper 1  
mode  
K
K
49 0~255 The bias value of the transfer roller is  
set. The higher the value, the larger the  
transformer output becomes. This ad-  
49 0~255 justment value becomes effective only  
when the setting mode (08-400, 401,  
69 0~255 409) is 0 (disabled).  
1
1
364  
365  
OHP mode  
Thick paper 2  
mode  
K
K
1
1
59 0~255  
367-0 Transfer bias output  
367-1 voltage 1 (lower)  
367-2  
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
K
589 0~5000 Actual output voltage of the transfer  
589 0~5000 roller bias. After replacing the transfer  
589 0~5000 transformer, enter the value according to  
589 0~5000 the supplementary data sheet.  
3929 0~5000  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
367-3  
368-0 Transfer bias output  
368-1 voltage 2 (upper)  
368-2  
3929 0~5000  
3929 0~5000  
368-3  
4715 0~5000  
381 Transfer bias output Thick  
89 0~255 The bias value of the transfer roller is  
89 0~255 set. The higher the value, the larger the  
89 0~255 transformer output becomes. The ad-  
89 0~255 justment value becomes effective only  
79 0~255 when the setting mode(08-400, 401,  
409) is 0 (disabled).  
382 adjustment  
383 (Full color)  
384  
paper 3  
mode  
385 Transfer bias output Thick  
adjustment  
(Black)  
paper 3  
mode  
391 Automatic removing Color (Y, M, C)  
–
–
–
–
The developer material in the developer  
unit is removed into the toner bag.  
6
6
392 of developer mate-  
rial  
K
400 Reproduction ratio adjustment of  
primary-scanning direction  
(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor  
rotation speed)  
1222 1209~ When the value increases by 1, the re-  
1235 production ratio in the primary-scanning  
direction (horizontal paper feeding di-  
rection) decreases by approx. 0.082%.  
(If the values of this code 400 is chang-  
ed, the values of code 05-401,402,403,  
404,410 and 474 are optimized.)  
1
401 Reproduction ratio adjustment of  
secondary-scanning direction  
1787 1608~ When the value increases by 1, the re-  
1965 production ratio in the secondary-scan-  
ning direction (vertical paper feeding di-  
rection) decreases by approx. 0.074%.  
(If the values of this code 401 is chang-  
ed, the values of code 05-402,403,404,  
410 and 474 are optimized.)  
1
(Fine adjustment of drum motor/  
transfer belt motor rotation speed)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 23  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
402 Fine adjustment of  
fuser motor rotation speed  
3767  
9832  
–
0~  
When the value increases by 1, the rota-  
1
65535 tion speed of fuser motor decreases  
by 0.026%.  
404 Fine adjustment of  
feed motor rotation speed  
0~  
When the value increases by 1, the rota-  
1
65535 tion speed of the paper feed motor de-  
creases by 0.023%.  
406 Registration motor speed adjustment  
–
The paper transport speed of registra-  
tion roller in relation to the image print-  
ing speed is set at the optimum value.  
(If the value of this code 406 is perform-  
ed, the values of the code 05-404 and  
410 are optimized.)  
15  
407 Forced performing of  
color registration control  
–
0
–
Performs the color registration control.  
6
1
408 Correction of fuser motor speed  
(For the Thick paper 3 mode )  
0~20 In the thick paper 3 mode, when the  
value increases by 1, the fuser motor  
rotation speed decreases by 0.026%.  
410 Fine adjustment of  
2853 2567~ When the value increases by 1, the re-  
3138 gistration motor rotation speed decreases  
by 0.035%. (If the value of this code 410  
is performed, the value of the code 05-404  
is optimized.  
1
1
registration motor rotation speed  
428 Adjustment of image trailing edge  
margin  
160 0~255 When the value increases by 1, the mar-  
gin at the trailing edge along the paper  
feeding direction becomes narrower by  
approx. 0.042mm.  
439 Paper aligning  
1st  
Long 20  
0~40 When the value increases by 1, the ali-  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
440 amount adjustment cassette Short 25  
0~40 gning amount increases by about  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
446  
447  
448  
449  
450  
451  
452  
2nd  
cassette Short 25  
3rd Long 20  
cassette Short 25  
4th Long 20  
cassette Short 25  
Long 20  
0~40 0.8mm.  
0~40  
0~40 Notes:  
0~40 Long (= Long size paper) :  
0~40 Paper length 330mm or longer  
0~40 (A3/LD/A3 wide/FULL BLEED)  
ADU  
Long 20  
Short 25  
25  
0~40 Short (= Short size paper) :  
0~40 Paper length 220mm ~ 329mm  
LCF  
0~40  
0~40  
0~50  
0~50  
Bypass feed  
Thick paper 2  
Thick paper 3  
35  
40  
40  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 24  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
461 Color registration status display  
0
0~255 The value of Y(0) shows the error status  
of the color registration sensor.  
0 / 16 or above: Normal  
10  
1~14: Data abnormal (sensor normal)  
15: Color registration pattern reading  
error  
470 Adjustment of primary-scan-  
ning laser writing start position  
K
100 0~255 When the value increases by 1, the im-  
age shifts by approx. 0.042mm toward  
1
1
1
the right side of paper feed direction.  
474 Adjustment of secondary-scan-  
ning laser writing start position  
8
1~15 When the value increases by 1, the im-  
age shifts by approx. 0.6mm toward the  
leading edge of paper feed direction.  
482 Reproduction ratio adjustment of  
the primary-scanning direction  
(scanner section)  
127 112~ When the value increases by 1, the re-  
142 production ratio of the primary-scanning  
direction (paper feeding in horizontal  
direction) decreases by 0.082%.  
491 Adjustment of the  
pushing amount  
from behind  
Thick paper 3  
bypass feeding  
9
0~14 When the value increases by 1, the time  
period the bypass feed roller is driven  
when the paper has started to be trans-  
ported from the registration section in-  
creases by 7ms.  
1
492 Paper aligning amout adjustment  
(OHP bypass feeding)  
40  
9
0~50 When the value increases by 1, the ali-  
gning amount increases by about  
0.8mm.  
1
1
493 Adjustment of the  
pushing amount  
from behind  
OHP  
0~14 When the value increases by 1, the time  
period the bypass feed roller is driven  
when the paper has started to be trans-  
ported from the registration section in-  
creases by 7ms.  
bypass feeding  
494  
LCF  
0
0~12 When the value increases by 1, the time  
period the LCF feed roller is driven  
when the paper has started to be trans-  
ported from the pre-feed roller section in-  
creases by 50ms.  
1
495  
496  
497  
498  
Thin paper  
0
9
9
9
0~14 When the value increases by 1, the time  
period the bypass feed roller is driven  
0~14 when the paper has started to be trans-  
ported from the registration section in-  
0~14 creases by 7ms.  
1
1
1
1
bypass feeding  
Normal paper  
bypass feeding  
Thick paper 1  
bypass feeding  
Thick paper 2  
bypass feeding  
0~14  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 25  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
550 Density  
Full color Text/Photo 128 0~255 When the value increases, images  
Text 128 0~255 made at center density become darker.  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
551 adjustment  
552 "Manual density"  
553 fine adjustment  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
554 (center setting)  
555  
Black  
Text/Photo 128 0~255  
Text 128 0~255  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
556  
557  
558  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
559  
128 0~255  
560 Density  
Full color Text/Photo  
Text  
20 0~255 When the value increases, images  
20 0~255 made at the “dark” side become darker.  
561 adjustment  
562 "Manual density"  
Printedimage 20 0~255  
563 fine adjustment  
Photo  
Map  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
564 (darker setting)  
565  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
566  
567  
Printedimage 20 0~255  
568  
Photo  
Map  
20 0~255  
569  
20 0~255  
570 Density  
Full color Text/Photo  
Text  
20 0~255 When the value increases, images  
20 0~255 made at the “light” side become lighter.  
571 adjustment  
572 "Manual density"  
Printedimage 20 0~255  
573 fine adjustment  
Photo  
Map  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
574 (lighter setting)  
575  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
576  
577  
Printedimage 20 0~255  
578  
Photo  
Map  
20 0~255  
20 0~255  
579  
580 Density  
581 adjustment  
582 "Automatic  
583 density" fine  
584 adjustment  
585  
Full color Text/Photo 128 0~255 When the value increases, images be-  
Text 128 0~255 come darker.  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Black  
Text/Photo 128 0~255  
Text 128 0~255  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
586  
587  
588  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
589  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 26  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
612 Adjustment of  
Normal paper 255 0~255 When the value decreases, images  
Thick paper 1 249 0~255 become lighter.  
1
1
613 maximum toner  
614 amount  
Thick paper 2 237 0~255 Note: When the value increases, image  
Thick paper 3 237 0~255 offset may occur.  
1
615  
616  
617  
1
OHP  
230 0~255  
255 0~255  
1
Thin paper  
1
643 Automatic gamma adjustment  
–
–
Adjusts the gradation reproduction for  
each color Y, M, C, K.  
13  
675 Judgment threshold for ACS  
104 0~255 When the value increases, originals  
tend to be judged as monochrome, and  
when the value decreases, they tend to  
be judged as color in Auto color mode.  
1
1
678 AI mode setting  
Discrimination  
0
0~4 Sets the operation mode of discrimina-  
tion processing in AI mode.  
0: Standard (for regular)  
setting  
1: Photograph priority  
2: Only judgment of original type  
3: Only judgment of original type with  
photograph priority  
4: Discrimination is not performed in  
AI mode.  
682  
Time-out  
setting  
63 11~99 Sets the maximum amount of processing  
time for image discrimination.  
1
Two digits are designated: the 1st digit is  
for setting A3/LD original and the 2nd di-  
git is for setting A4/LT original. (unit: second)  
698 Offset  
699 adjustment  
700 for background  
701 processing  
702 (Adjustment of  
703 background  
704 density)  
705  
Full color Text/Photo 128 0~255 When the value increases, the back-  
Text 128 0~255 ground becomes darker.  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
Black  
Text/Photo 128 0~255  
Text 128 0~255  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
706  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
707  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 27  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
708 Offset adjust-  
Full color Text/Photo 128 0~255 When the value increases, the text be-  
Text 128 0~255 comes darker.  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
709 ment  
710 for background  
711 processing  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
712 (Adjustment of  
713 text density)  
Black  
Text/Photo 128 0~255  
Text 128 0~255  
Printedimage 128 0~255  
714  
715  
716  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
128 0~255  
717  
737 Sharpness  
Full color Text/Photo  
Text  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0~31 When the value increases, the image  
738 adjustment  
0~31 becomes sharper. When the value  
0~31 decreases, the image becomes softer.  
0~31 The smaller the value, the fewer the  
0~31 moire becomes.  
739  
Printedimage  
Photo  
740  
741  
Map  
742  
Black  
Text/Photo  
Text  
0~31 *The default value 0 is equivalent to 16  
0~31 (center value).  
743  
744  
Printedimage  
Photo  
0~31  
745  
0~31  
746  
Map  
0~31  
779-0 Color balance  
779-1 adjustment  
779-2 (Y)  
780-0  
Text/  
L
M
H
L
128 0~255 When the value increases, the target  
128 0~255 color, the original mode and the density  
128 0~255 area become darker.  
128 0~255  
Photo  
Text  
780-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255 Notes:  
780-2  
128 0~255 L: Low density area  
128 0~255 M: Medium density area  
128 0~255 H: High density area  
128 0~255  
781-0  
Printed  
image  
781-1  
M
H
L
781-2  
782-0  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
782-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255  
782-2  
128 0~255  
783-0  
128 0~255  
783-1  
M
H
128 0~255  
783-2  
128 0~255  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 28  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
784-0 Color balance  
784-1 adjustment  
784-2 (M)  
785-0  
Text/  
L
M
H
L
128 0~255 When the value increases, the target  
128 0~255 color, the original mode and the density  
128 0~255 area become darker.  
128 0~255  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Photo  
Text  
785-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255 Notes:  
785-2  
128 0~255 L: Low density area  
128 0~255 M: Medium density area  
128 0~255 H: High density area  
128 0~255  
786-0  
Printed  
image  
786-1  
M
H
L
786-2  
787-0  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
787-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255  
787-2  
128 0~255  
788-0  
128 0~255  
788-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255  
788-2  
128 0~255  
789-0 Color balance  
789-1 adjustment  
789-2 (C)  
790-0  
Text/  
128 0~255 When the value increases, the target  
128 0~255 color, the original mode and the density  
128 0~255 area become darker.  
128 0~255  
Photo  
M
H
L
Text  
790-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255 Notes:  
790-2  
128 0~255 L: Low density area  
128 0~255 M: Medium density area  
128 0~255 H: High density area  
128 0~255  
791-0  
Printed  
image  
791-1  
M
H
L
791-2  
792-0  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
792-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255  
792-2  
128 0~255  
793-0  
128 0~255  
793-1  
M
H
128 0~255  
793-2  
128 0~255  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 29  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment mode (05)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Description/Mode  
Default table  
Value  
Contents  
794-0 Color balance  
794-1 adjustment  
794-2 (K)  
795-0  
Text/  
L
M
H
L
128 0~255 When the value increases, the target  
128 0~255 color, the original mode and the density  
128 0~255 area become darker.  
128 0~255  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
Photo  
Text  
795-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255 Notes:  
795-2  
128 0~255 L: Low density area  
128 0~255 M: Medium density area  
128 0~255 H: High density area  
128 0~255  
796-0  
Printed  
image  
796-1  
M
H
L
796-2  
797-0  
Photo  
Map  
128 0~255  
797-1  
M
H
L
128 0~255  
797-2  
128 0~255  
798-0  
128 0~255  
798-1  
M
H
128 0~255  
798-2  
128 0~255  
817 Output value display When the light  
–
–
–
–
–
0~1023 Displays the output value of image qua-  
lity sensor when the sensor light source  
is OFF.  
of image quality  
sensor  
source is OFF  
818  
819  
820  
Transfer belt  
surface  
0~1023 Displays the output value of image qua-  
lity sensor (when there is no test pattern)  
on the transfer belt.  
2
Low-density  
pattern  
0~1023 Displays the output value of image qua-  
lity sensor when a low-density test pat-  
tern is written.  
10  
10  
2
High-density  
pattern  
0~1023 Displays the output value of image qua-  
lity sensor when a high-density test pat-  
tern is written.  
821 Light amount adjustment results of  
image quality sensor  
0~255 This sensor's LED light amount adjust-  
ment value is the reference value for  
setting the reflected light amount from  
the belt surface.  
822 Output value  
display of image  
Medium-density  
pattern  
–
0~1023 Displays the output value of image qua-  
lity sensor when a medium-density test  
pattern is written.  
10  
quality sensor  
878 Forced performing of  
image quality control  
–
–
Performs the image quality control.  
6
6
879 Automatic initialization of  
image quality control  
–
–
Performs the image quality control and  
restore the initial value.  
912-0 Magazine sort/  
912-1 fine adjustment of  
912-2 folding and stapling  
position  
A4-R/LT-R  
0
-14~14 When the value increases by 1, the  
-14~14 folding and stapling position shift by  
-14~14 approx. 0.25mm toward the right page.  
4
4
4
B4  
0
0
A3/LD  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 30  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Operation procedure>  
Procedure 1  
0
5
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
(Set a value)  
POWER  
CLEAR  
CANCEL or  
(For correction)  
Procedure 2  
0
5
SET or INTERRUPT  
(A value  
displayed)  
( ENERGY SAVER START )  
(Test copy)  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
POWER  
(Value changing  
not allowed)  
Procedure 4  
START  
SET or INTERRUPT  
0
5
START  
START  
(Code)  
(Sub-code)  
(Set a value)  
(Stored in memory)  
POWER  
CLEAR  
CANCEL or  
(For correction)  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Procedure 5  
0
5
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
(Automatic  
adjustment)  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
START  
(Code)  
POWER  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 31  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure 6  
0
5
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
(Automatic  
adjustment)  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
START  
(Code)  
POWER  
Procedure 10  
START  
0
5
SET or INTERRUPT  
START  
START  
(Code)  
(Sub-code)  
POWER  
(Value changing not allowed)  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
Procedure 13  
STOP  
START  
0
5
(Automatic  
adjustment)  
START  
*Not acceptable  
POWER  
(Code)  
when error occurs.  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
START )  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Image processing calculation)  
Procedure 15  
0
5
(Set 5 adjustment  
charts for bypass)  
(Automatic  
adjustment)  
START  
INTERRUPT  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
POWER  
(Stored in memory)  
(Jam or Error)  
CLEAR  
FC-210/310ERRORCODESANDSELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 32  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. 2. 5 Setting mode (08)  
The following items can be set or changed in this mode (08).  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
value  
Contents  
200 Date and time setting  
201 Destination selection  
–
13 digits Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/second  
Example: 99:08:07:5:11:30:48  
1
1
EUR:0 0 ~ 2  
UC:1  
0: Europe (A4/A3/Folio)  
1: USA/Canada (Letter/Ledger)  
2: Japan (A4/B4)  
JPN:2  
202 Externally installed copy  
counter/controller device  
0
0 ~ 3  
0: No external copy counter/controller device  
1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card  
3: Key copy counter  
1
1
204 Auto-clear timer setting  
3
0 ~ 10 When the [START] key is not pressed, the  
time ag before automatic clearing works to  
l
clear settings to defaults.  
0: Disabled 1 to 10: Set number x 15 seconds  
0 ~ 15 Timer for switching to Energy Saver mode se-  
lected in 08-618 when the copier is not used.  
0: Disabled 1: 30sec. 2: 60sec.  
205 Energy saver timer setting  
0
1
3: 90sec. 4: 120sec. 5: 150sec.  
6: 3min 7: 4min 8: 5min 9: 7min  
10: 10min 11: 15min 12: 20min  
13: 30min 14: 45min 15: 60min  
206 Automatic shutoff timer setting  
20  
0 ~ 20 Timer for switching to automatic shutoff state  
when the copier is not used. US Energy Star  
Compliance  
1
0: 3min 1: 5min 2: 10min 3: 15min  
4: 20min 5: 25min 6: 30min  
7: 40min 8: 50min 9: 60min  
10: 70min 11: 80min 12: 90min  
13: 100min 14: 110min 15: 120min  
16: 150min 17: 180min 18: 210min  
19: 240min 20: Disabled  
209 Timer for print job start-up time  
from copy mode when auto-  
clear is disabled  
1
1 ~ 10 Sets the period the control panel is not ope-  
rated when the data of the printer function is  
sent before the print job starts. This function  
is enabled when the auto-clear timer setting  
(08-204) is set as "0" (disabled).  
1
(Set number x 15 seconds)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 33  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
value  
Contents  
217 Information of cassettes  
installation  
15  
0 ~ 15 0: 4 cassettes 1: 2 cassettes 2: 3 cassettes  
3: 4 cassettes 4: 1 cassette(Forcibly  
installing OFF) 15: Automatic  
1
220  
Selection of language (UI)  
on the display panel  
EUR:0  
UC:6  
0 ~6  
0: Language 1  
2: Language 3  
4: Language 5  
6: Language 7  
1: Language 2  
3: Language 4  
5: Language 6  
1
JPN:5  
Note: On the control panel,  
EUR, JPN: language 1 to 6 are selectable.  
UC: language 2 to 7 are selectable.  
229 Paper size setting/  
bypass feed  
–
0~255 Paper size is selected with the icons on the  
LCD.  
1
1
230 Paper size setting/  
1st cassette  
EUR:A4 0~255 Paper size is selected with the icons on the  
UC:LT  
LCD.  
JPN:A4  
231 Paper size setting/  
2nd cassette  
EUR:A3 0~255 Paper size is selected with the icons on the  
1
1
1
1
UC:LD  
LCD.  
JPN:A3  
232 Paper size setting/  
3rd cassette  
EUR:A4-R 0~255 Paper size is selected with the icons on the  
UC:LT-R  
JPN:A4-R  
LCD.  
233 Paper size setting/  
4th cassette  
EUR:A4 0~255 Paper size is selected with the icons on the  
UC:LG  
JPN:B4  
0
LCD.  
250 Telephone number for “Call for  
service”  
14  
A telephone number up to 14 digits can be  
entered. Use the [HELP] key to enter hy-  
phens (–).  
digits  
253 Error history display  
256 Paper size setting/  
LCF  
–
–
The last twenty error records are displayed.  
2
1
EUR:A4 0 ~ 255 Paper size is selected with the icons on the  
UC:LT  
JPN:A4  
–
LCD.  
257 Counter copy  
1 ~ 2  
1: Copies the original counter value to the  
backup counter.  
–
2: Copies the backup counter value to the  
original counter.  
(
Page 1-48)  
267 C9B/C9D Error history display  
–
0
–
Displays the errror status of [C9B] and [C9D].  
2
1
300 Maximum number of copies  
allowed  
0 ~ 2  
0: 999 1: 99 2: 9  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 34  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
EUR: 3 0 ~ 3  
UC: 0  
302 Resettable/original counter  
display  
Sets if the resettable and original counters  
are displayed.  
1
JPN:0  
0: Off  
1: Resettable counter  
2: Original counter  
3: Resettable/original counter  
318 Paper size (non-standard)  
feeding/widthwise direction  
360 RADF switch back  
432/ 148~457/  
279 100~305  
4
1
0
0 ~ 1  
Reversing the RADF transport belt during  
original transporting to align originals  
against the original scale.  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
361 RADF  
0
0 ~ 1  
When non-standard originals are used;  
0: Non-standard - Copier will stop and  
prompt operator to select copy size.  
1: Standard - Copier continues the current  
job without stopping  
1
non-standard size original  
detection  
390 HDD error frequency counter  
400 Image quality control 1  
0
1
0~32767 Resets when formatting the HDD  
2
1
0 ~ 1  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled (Performing 08-410,413)  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
401 Image quality control 2  
402 Image quality control 5  
1
1
1
1
0 ~ 1  
1
1
1
1
* If Image quality control 1(08-400) is 0  
(Disabled), this value must be set to 0  
(Disabled).  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
* If both image quality control 2 (08-401) and  
4 (08-411) are 0 (Disabled), this value must  
be set to 0 (Disabled).  
404 Image quality control  
auto-start (relative humidity  
changes)  
After the last image quality control, if the  
variation of the relative humidity inside the  
copier becomes larger than the set value in  
08-405, image quality control will be started  
when the printing begins.  
405 Relative humidity difference  
setting at image qulity control  
auto-start  
Sets the difference of the relative humidity  
for image quality control auto-start (relative  
humidity changes).  
0: 5%R.H.  
3: 20%R.H.  
6: 35%R.H.  
1: 10%R.H.  
4: 25%R.H.  
2: 15%R.H.  
5: 30%R.H.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 35  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~ 1  
406 Image quality control  
auto-start (standby time)  
1
After printing is finished and the time set in  
08-452 has passed, image quality control  
will start when printing is started or the  
energy saver key is pressed.  
1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
407 Image quality control  
0
1
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
During continuous printing, image quality  
control is started for every print volume set  
in 08-453.  
1
1
auto-start (continuous printing)  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
408 Image quality control  
auto-start (accumulated  
print volume)  
When the accumulated print volume since  
the last image quality control has attained  
the amount set in 08-455, image quality  
control automatically starts after the current  
printing job.  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
409 Image quality control 3  
1
1
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled  
1
1
1: Enabled (Performing 08-410,413)  
Performing drum surface potential correction  
by drum thermistor detection temperature for  
image quality control.  
410 Drum surface potential  
correction control  
by drum temperature  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
* This selection is reflected if ‘Image quality  
controls 1 and 3 (08-400,409)’ have been  
set to 1 (Enabled).  
411 Image quality control 4  
1
1
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
Auto-performing of image quality control  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
1
1
* If image quality control 2 (08-401) is 0 (Dis-  
abled), this value must be set to 0 (Disabled).  
Performing transfer roller bias correction  
by the temperature and humidity sensor for  
image quality control.  
413 Transfer roller bias correction  
control by temperature and  
humidity  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
* This selection is reflected if ‘Image quality  
controls 1 and 3 (08-400,409)’ have been  
set to 1 (Enabled).  
415 Image quality control  
abnormal detection  
counter (Y)  
0
0 ~ 16 Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16 times)  
1
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1(Enabled).  
display/0 clearing  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 36  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
value  
Contents  
416 Image quality control  
abnormal detection  
0
0
0
0 ~ 16 Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16 times)  
1
1
1
counter (M)  
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1 (Enabled).  
display/0 clearing  
417 Image quality control  
abnormal detection  
0 ~ 16 Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16 times)  
counter (C)  
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1 (Enabled).  
display/0 clearing  
418 Image quality control  
abnormal detection  
0 ~ 16 Accumulated total of CE1, CE2, CE4  
(Max.16 times)  
counter (K)  
* Enabled when ‘Image quality control 3  
(08-401)’ is 1 (Enabled).  
display/0 clearing  
452 Image quality control auto-  
start time setting (standby time)  
453 Image quality control  
auto-start print volume setting  
(continuous printing)  
4
0 ~ 24 Setting time (hour) of Image quality control  
auto-start (standby time)  
1
1
300  
0 ~ 999 Setting print volume (number of sheets) to  
automatically start Image quality control  
(continuous printing)  
455 Image quality control  
auto-start print volume setting  
(accumulated print volume)  
480 Paper source priority  
10  
0
0 ~ 30 Setting print volume (set value x 100 sheets)  
to automatically start Image quality control  
(accumulated print volume)  
1
1
1
0 ~ 5  
0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: 1st cassette  
3: 2nd cassette 4: 3rd cassette  
5: 4th cassette  
481 Automatic paper source  
change  
1
0 ~ 2  
Sets if the cassette is automatically switched to  
the other cassette which has the paper of the  
same size when paper in the selected one  
has run out.  
0: Not switch  
1: Switch if paper of the same size and  
same direction presents (ex.A4 to A4).  
2: Switch if paper of the same size presents  
(different direction is acceptable) (ex. A4  
to A4-R).  
485 Polygonal motor rotation at  
standby  
0
0 ~ 1  
Setting of polygonal motor rotation at  
standby  
1
0: Low speed rotation (standby rotation)  
1: Stop  
501 Original mode priority  
0
0
0 ~ 5  
0 ~ 5  
0: Text/photo 1: Text 2: Printed image  
3: Photo 4: Map 5:Al  
1
1
502 Original mode priority  
(Black)  
0: Text/photo 1: Text 2: Printed image  
3: Photo 4: Map 5:Al  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 37  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~ 1  
503 Density mode priority  
1
0: Automatic 1: Manual (Center)  
1
504 Color mode priority  
600 Access code mode  
2
0
0 ~ 2  
0 ~ 2  
0: Auto color 1: Black 2: Full color  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
1
1
2: Department management  
0: Display OFF 1: Display ON  
602 Display setting for  
Automatic energy saver /  
Automatic shutoff  
EUR:1 0 ~ 1  
UC:1  
1
1
1
JPN:0  
603 Automatic duplexing mode  
priority (when using RADF)  
0
0 ~ 3  
0 ~ 2  
0: Disabled  
1: Single-sided to duplexed  
2: Two-sided to duplexed 3: User selection  
0: APS mode  
604 APS (Automatic Paper Selec  
tion) / AMS (Automatic  
0
1: AMS mode  
Magnification Selection)  
mode priority  
2: None  
607 RADF feeding mode priority  
0
2
2
0 ~ 1  
2 ~ 3  
1 ~ 2  
0: Continuous feeding by START key  
1: SADF (Automatic feeding by setting  
original)  
1
1
1
1
609 Original mode priority  
(scanning)  
The initial value of the original mode in the  
scan function is set.  
2: Printed image 3: Photo  
The initial value of the color mode in the  
scan function is set.  
610 Color mode priority  
(scanning)  
1: Gray scale  
2: Full color  
611 Book duplexed copy original  
priority  
0
5
0 ~ 1  
0~10  
0: Left page to right page  
1: Right page to left page  
Set value x 1mm  
612 Image repeat gap  
613 [OTHER KEY] paper size  
setting  
1
1
EUR:13 0 ~ 13 0: A3 1: A4 2: A4-R 3: A5-R 4: B4  
UC:12  
JPN:3  
5: B5 6: B5-R 7: LT 8: LT-R 9: LD  
10: LG 11: ST 12: COMPUTER  
13: FOLIO 14: A6-R 15: Postcard  
Sets the datum position of image when the  
RADF is used.  
617 RADF image shifting  
618 Energy saver mode  
0
0
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
1
1
0: Without shift (center) 1: With shift (corner)  
0: Energy saver mode with priority aim of  
energy saving (Refer to 08-712)  
1: Energy saver mode with priority aim of  
returning to standby (Refer to 08-713)  
619 Initial value setting of book  
center erase margin  
10  
0
0 ~ 50 Set value x 1mm  
1
1
620 APS forced start setting /  
selection  
0 ~ 2  
0: Single press of key  
1: Double press of key 2: Disabled  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 38  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accept-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~ 2  
622 Reading resolution initial  
value setting  
2
1
The initial value of the read resolution in the  
scan function is set.  
1
(scanning)  
0: 600dpi  
1: 300dpi  
2: 150dpi  
623 Permanent file format initial  
value setting  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
When the data read by the scan function is  
saved into the mail box, the initial value of  
the file format is set.  
1
(scanning)  
0: PDF  
1: JPEG  
2:TIFF  
630 Automatic paper source  
change from bypass tray  
0
Sets if the paper source is switched to the  
other casssette which has the paper of the  
same size when the paper on the bypass  
tray has run out.  
1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
631 Transfer belt release control  
in the auto color mode  
0
1
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 2  
Sets if the transfer belt is released when the  
original is judged as black-and-white.  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
1
1
632 Autoamtic calibration disclo-  
sure level  
Sets the disclosing level of automatic  
calibration.  
0: Service technician  
1: Administrator 2: User  
634 Initial value setting of repeat  
frequency in the image repeat  
mode  
2
0
2 ~ 8  
Set value = Repeat frequency  
1
635 RADF mixed originals mode  
setting priority  
0 ~ 1  
0~2  
0: Same originai size 1: Mixed original size  
1
1
640 Date printing format  
EUR:1  
UC:2  
Sets the date printing format at the list  
printing.  
JPN:0  
0:YYYY.MM.DD  
2: MM.DD.YYYY  
1: DD.MM.YYYY  
641 Automatic sorting mode  
priority (when using RADF)  
2
0
1
0 ~ 3  
0 ~ 3  
0 ~ 2  
0: OFF 1: STAPLE 2: SORT  
3: GROUP  
1
1
1
642 Sorter mode setting priority  
0: NON SORT 1: STAPLE 2: SORT  
3: GROUP  
643 E-mail transmission  
file format default setting  
Sets the default file format when the image  
data read by the scan function is send by  
E-mail.  
0: PDF 1: JPEG 2:TIFF  
Sets the default attachment format when the  
image data read by the scan function is  
send by E-mail.  
644 E-mail transmission  
file attachment format default  
setting  
0
0 ~ 1  
1
0: Attachment 1: URL  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 39  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
value  
Contents  
645 Correction of reproduction  
ratio in the editing copy mode  
10  
0 ~ 10 Sets the reproduction ratio for X in 1 copy  
(including magazine sort) to "Reproduction  
ratio x Correction ratio (followings)".  
0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94%  
5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99%  
10: 100%  
1
646 Image position in the editing  
copy mode  
0
0
0
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
Sets the image pasting datum for each page  
in the X in 1 copy (including magazine sort).  
0: Corner (upper left) 1: Center  
1
1
648 Initializing of the finisher tray  
at Auto-clear  
Sets whether the finisher tray moves to the  
1-bin or not at Auto-clear  
0: Not move  
1: Move  
650 2 in 1 / 4 in 1 setting  
0: Horizontal writing original  
1: Vertical writing original  
1
1
1
1
1
2
653 Copier administrator’s  
password  
00000 00000 ~ Sets the password for administrator in the  
99999 department management.  
681 Cascade operation setting  
(printer)  
0
0
0
0
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
0: OFF  
1: ON  
682 Magazine sort setting  
0: Left page to right page  
1: Right page to left page  
683 Cascade operation setting  
(copier)  
0: OFF  
1: ON  
684 Summer time function  
0: Not summer time  
1: Summer time  
690 HDD formatting  
–
–
2
2: Normal format  
0: Not formatted  
1
2
691 HDD status display  
0 ~ 2  
2: Normal formatted  
693 HDD standby mode  
1
0
0 ~ 10 Sets the time lag before entering the HDD  
standby status.  
1
1
* This value may need to be changed when  
the HDD is replaced since the characteristics  
of HDDs are different among makers.  
700 Fuser error status counter  
0 ~ 9  
0: Normal  
1:[C41] error  
2: Continuous [C41] error  
3: –  
4: [C43] error 5: [C44] error 6: [C42] error  
7: [C46] error 8: [C47] error 9: [C48] error  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 40  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
value  
Contents  
712 Fuser roller temperature for  
energy saver mode with  
3
0 ~ 17 0: OFF 1: 60°C 2: 65°C 3: 70°C  
4: 75°C 5: 80°C 6: 85°C 7: 90°C  
1
priority aim of energy saving  
8: 95°C 9: 100°C 10: 105°C 11: 110°C  
12: 115°C  
15: 130°C  
13: 120°C 14: 125°C  
16: 135°C 17: 140°C  
713 Fuser roller temperature for  
energy saver mode with  
priority aim of returning to  
standby  
13  
0 ~ 17 0: OFF 1: 60°C 2: 65°C 3: 70°C  
4: 75°C 5: 80°C 6: 85°C 7: 90°C  
1
8: 95°C 9: 100°C 10: 105°C 11: 110°C  
12: 115°C  
15: 130°C  
13: 120°C 14: 125°C  
16: 135°C 17: 140°C  
742 Color registration control  
0
1
0
0 ~ 1  
0 ~ 1  
0 ~  
0: Automatic 1: Manual  
1
1
1
743 Color registration control  
during the warming-up  
801 Electronic total counter  
display  
0: Disabled 1: Enabled  
Electronic counter counts the number of all  
99999999 printouts in the copier/printer function.  
(Code 08-802 is reflected.)  
802 Large-size double count  
setting  
EUR:0 0 ~ 2  
UC:1  
0: Single count 1: Double count  
2: Single count (Double count for key copy  
counter)  
1
JPN:0  
*Double-counted paper size is set in code  
08-888. Code 08-801, 813 and key copy  
counter reflect this setting.  
803 Short-size counter display  
(card~A4-R/LT-R)  
0
0
0
0 ~  
9999999  
0 ~  
Counts the number of short-sized printouts.  
1
1
1
804 Long-size counter display  
(B4/LG~A3 wide/FULL BLEED)  
808 Bypass counter display  
Counts the number of long-sized printouts.  
Counts the number of printouts in the  
9999999  
0 ~  
9999999 bypass feed. (Single count for every  
paper size)  
809 LCF counter display  
813 Test print counter  
0
0
0 ~  
9999999 LCF. (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printouts in the test  
Counts the number of printouts fed from the  
1
1
9999999 print mode. (In the test print mode, only this  
counter is counted. Code 08-802 is reflected.)  
814 Single-sided print counter  
display  
0
0
0
0 ~  
9999999 (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Counts the number of duplexd printouts.  
9999999 (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Counts the frequency of paper jam in  
9999999 bypass feeding. (Accumulated total of E12)  
Counts the number of single-sided printouts.  
1
1
1
815 Duplexed print counter display  
817 Bypass jam counter display  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 41  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~  
818 Registration jam counter  
display  
0
0
0
Jam on paper trailing edge at the  
1
1
1
9999999 registration roller (Accumulated total of E01)  
0 ~ Frequency of paper exit jam  
9999999 (Accumulated total of E01, E02)  
820 Paper exit jam counter display  
822 ADU counter display  
0 ~  
Counts the number of printouts fed from the  
9999999 ADU stack.  
(Single count for every paper size)  
Counts the number of originals fed from the  
9999999 RADF. (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Frequency of paper jam when paper fed  
9999999 from the LCF (Accumulated total of E19, E21)  
0 ~ Frequency of paper jam after paper fed from  
9999999 the ADU stack (Accumulated total of E11, E54)  
0 ~ Frequency of paper jam before paper reach  
824 RADF original counter display  
825 LCF jam counter display  
0
0
0
0
0 ~  
1
1
1
1
826 ADU paper-feed jam counter  
display  
827 ADU stack jam counter  
9999999 the ADU stack (Accumulated total of E50,  
E51, E52)  
831 Setting the target for the key  
copy counter  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 ~ 3  
1: Copier 2: Printer 3: Copier/Printer  
1
1
1
1
1
1
832 1st cassette counter display  
0 ~  
Counts the number of printouts fed from the  
9999999 1st cassette. (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printouts fed from the  
9999999 2nd cassette. (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printouts fed from the  
9999999 3rd cassette. (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printouts fed from the  
9999999 4th cassette. (Single count for every paper size)  
0 ~ Frequency of paper jam when paper fed  
833 2nd cassette counter display  
834 3rd cassette counter display  
835 4th cassette counter dispaly  
836 1st cassette jam counter  
display  
9999999 from the 1st cassette. (Accumulated total of  
E13, E22)  
837 2nd cassette jam counter  
display  
0
0
0
0
0 ~  
Frequency of paper jam when paper fed  
1
1
1
1
9999999 from the 2nd cassette. (Accumulated total of  
E14, E23)  
838 3rd cassette jam counter  
display  
0 ~  
Frequency of paper jam when paper fed  
9999999 from the 3rd cassette. (Accumulated total of  
E15, E24)  
839 4th cassette jam counter  
display  
0 ~  
Frequency of paper jam when paper fed  
9999999 from the 4th cassette. (Accumulated total of  
E16, E25)  
840 Drum Y life counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0 ~  
Counts the number of sheets printed at  
999999 drum Y. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 42  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~  
841 Drum M life counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
Counts the number of sheets printed at  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
999999 drum M. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of sheets printed at  
999999 drum C. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of sheets printed at  
999999 drum K. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of sheets printed by  
9999999 developer Y. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of sheets printed by  
9999999 developer M. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of sheets printed by  
9999999 developer C. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of sheets printed by  
9999999 developer K. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printed sheets of the transfer  
9999999 belt unit. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printed sheets of the  
9999999 fuser unit. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ Counts the number of printed sheets of thefuse  
9999999 r oil roller. (Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
0 ~ General maintenance counter value  
842 Drum C life counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
843 Drum K life counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
844 Developer Y counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
845 Developer M counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
846 Developer C counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
847 Developer K counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
853 Transfer belt unit counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
854 Fuser unit counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
0
855 Fuser oil roller counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
857 Counter setting for general  
PM  
Refer to  
Contents 999999 (number of printouts)  
column  
<Default value>  
FC-210 EUR: 40000 UC: 40000 JPN: 0  
FC-310 EUR: 60000 UC: 60000 JPN: 0  
The counter for life management at the OHP/  
Thick paper mode;  
858 OHP/Thick paper double count  
1
0 ~ 1  
1
0: Disabled - Counts up normally.  
1: Enabled - Counts up doubly.  
Rotation time (sec.) of color drum motor  
867 Drum Y drive counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 ~  
999999  
0 ~  
1
1
1
1
1
1
868 Drum M drive counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
Rotation time (sec.) of color drum motor  
Rotation time (sec.) of color drum motor  
Rotation time (sec.) of black drum motor  
Rotation time (sec.) of developer motor  
Rotation time (sec.) of developer motor  
999999  
0 ~  
869 Drum C drive counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
999999  
0 ~  
870 Drum K drive counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
999999  
0 ~  
871 Developer Y time counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
999999  
0 ~  
872 Developer M time counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
999999  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 43  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~  
873 Developer C time counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
0
2
Rotation time (sec.) of developer motor  
Rotation time (sec.) of developer motor  
1
1
1
999999  
0 ~  
874 Developer K time counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
999999  
0 ~ 2  
875 Life counter large-size  
double count setting  
0: Disabled  
1: A3, LD, A3 wide, FULL BLEED  
2: A3, LD, A3 wide, FULL BLEED, B4, LG,  
FOLIO, COMP  
876 Large-size counter display  
(Copier/Full color)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of large-size  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9999999 paper in the full color mode/copier function.  
(Code 08-802 and 888 are reflected.)  
877 Small-size counter display  
(Copier/Full color)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of small-size  
9999999 paper in the full color mode/copier function.  
(Code 08-888 is reflected.)  
878 Large-size counter display  
(Copier/Black)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of large-size  
9999999 paper in the black mode/copier function.  
(Code 08-802 and 888 are reflected.)  
879 Small-size counter display  
(Copier/Black)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of small-size  
9999999 paper in the black mode/copier function.  
(Code 08-888 is reflected.)  
880 Large-size counter display  
(Copier/Monocolor)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of large-size  
9999999 paper in the monocolor mode/copier function.  
(Code 08-802 and 888 are reflected.)  
881 Small-size counter display  
(Copier/Monocolor)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of small-size  
9999999 paper in the monocolor mode/copier function.  
(Code 08-888 is reflected.)  
882 Large-size counter display  
(Printer/Full color)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of large-size  
9999999 paper in the full color mode/printer function.  
(Code 08-802 and 888 are reflected.)  
883 Small-size counter display  
(Printer/Full color)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of small-size  
9999999 paper in the full color mode/printer function.  
(Code 08-888 is reflected.)  
884 Large-size counter display  
(Printer/Black)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of large-size  
9999999 paper in the black mode/printer function.  
(Code 08-802 and 888 are reflected.)  
885 Small-size counter display  
(Printer/Black)  
0~  
Counts the number of printouts of small-size  
9999999 paper in the black mode/printer function.  
(Code 08-888 is reflected.)  
888 Large-size setting  
1 ~ 2  
1: A3/LD/A3 wide/FULL BLEED  
2: A3/LD/A3 wide/FULL BLEED/B4/LG/FOLIO  
/COMP  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 44  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
0 ~  
892 Current value of general PM  
counter (display/0 clearing)  
0
0
0
Total number of printouts (copier + printer)  
1
1
1
1
999999 for life related (double count)  
(Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
894 Drum drive total counter for  
color PM life-time counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0 ~  
Rotation time (sec.) of color drum motor  
999999999  
896 Current value of color PM  
counter (display/0 clearing)  
0 ~  
Total number of full color and monocolor  
999999 printouts for life related (double count)  
(Code 08-858 and 875 are reflected.)  
897 Counter setting for color PM Refer to  
0 ~  
Color maintenance counter value  
Contents 999999 (number of printouts)  
column  
<Default value>  
FC-210 EUR: 40000 UC: 40000 JPN: 0  
FC-310 EUR: 60000 UC: 60000 JPN: 0  
Rotation time (sec.) of black drum motor  
898 Drum drive total counter for  
general PM life-time counter  
(display/0 clearing)  
0
–
0 ~  
1
2
999999999  
900 Firmware version  
(Basic section ROM)  
–
EUR: T314SEXXX  
UC: T314SUXXX  
JPN: T314SJXXX  
Other:T314SXXXX  
T314M-XX  
902 Engine ROM version (LGC)  
903 Printer ROM version (IMC)  
904 Scanner ROM version (SCM)  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
T314IMC-XX  
T314SCM-XX  
T511MAC-XX  
VX.X/Y.Y  
905 Macro-discrimination/  
discrimination version (AI ROM)  
920 FROM basic section software  
version  
921 FROM program internal  
version  
VXXX.YYY  
922 UI data fixed section  
version  
VXXX.YYY Z  
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
923 UI data common section  
version  
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
924 UI data 1st language version  
in HDD  
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
925 UI data 2nd language version  
in HDD  
(Z: Language code,  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 45  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting mode (08)  
Accep-  
Proce-  
dure  
Code  
Name  
Default table  
Contents  
value  
–
926 UI data 3rd language version  
–
VXXX.YYY Z  
2
in HDD  
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
Page. 5-22)  
927 UI data 4th language version  
in HDD  
–
–
–
–
–
–
2
2
2
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
928 UI data 5th language version  
in HDD  
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
929 UI data 6th language version  
in HDD  
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
930 UI data version in FROM  
displayed at power ON  
931 UI data 7th language version  
in HDD  
–
–
0
–
–
2
2
1
(Z: Language code,  
VXXX.YYY Z  
(Z: Language code,  
956 [FUNCTION CLEAR] key  
setting when the default paper  
cassette is not set  
0 ~ 1  
0: Enabled  
1: Disabled  
957 Icon for performing color  
registration control display  
0
0 ~ 1  
Displays the icon for performing the color  
registration control manually in the control  
panel display.  
1
0: Enabled  
1: Disabled  
1: 30 sheets  
962 Finisher  
0
0
0
0~2  
0~2  
0~1  
0: 50 sheets  
2: 20 sheets  
2: 10 sheets  
1
1
1
maximum number of sheets  
for stapling (short size)  
963 Finisher  
0: 30 sheets  
0: 15 sheets  
1: 15 sheets  
1: 8 sheets  
maximum number of sheets  
for stapling (long size)  
964 Saddle stitcher  
maximum number of sheets  
for stapling  
Note: The maximum number of the originals  
in the magazine sort mode is quadruple of  
the set number of the sheets.  
997 Fee charging system counter  
display  
–
Displays the fee charging related counter.  
2
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 46  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Operation procedure>  
Procedure 1  
0
8
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
START  
(Code)  
(Set a value)  
CLEAR  
POWER  
CANCEL or  
(For correction)  
Procedure 2  
0
8
SET or INTERRUPT  
(Changing the value is not allowed)  
START  
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(Code)  
POWER  
Procedure 4  
CANCEL  
SET  
0
8
POWER OFF/ON  
(Exit)  
(1st setting  
value)  
(2nd setting  
value)  
or  
(Code)  
START  
START  
POWER  
INTERRUPT  
(Stored in memory)  
CLEAR  
(For correction)  
Mode state  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
1 - 47  
FC-210/310ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<Procedure to copy the counter value (08-257)>>  
1.Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.  
2. Enter the code [257] with the digital keys and press the [START] key (the following is displayed).  
Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.  
[<][>]  
key  
৏ৎ  
3. Enter the value "1" or "2" with the digital key and press the [START] key.  
The value entered is displayed on the left of the "%", and the [SET] key is displayed.  
Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] key to change as long as the [START] key is  
not pressed. (The value on the left of the "%" is reset to "0" by pressing the [CLEAR] key.)  
• Enter "1" to copy the value of the original counter  
(LGC board) onto the value of the backup counter  
(SYS board).  
• Enter "2" to copy the value of the backup counter  
(SYS board) onto the value of the original counter  
(LGC board).  
4. Press the [SET] key to complete overwriting of  
the counter value.  
Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen  
without copying (overwriting) the value when  
the [CANCEL] key is pressed.  
FC-210/310 ERROR CODES AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS  
1 - 48  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. ADJUSTMENT  
2.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)  
The diagram below explains the main procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing  
components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions  
are to be obeyed in priority.  
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted  
lines lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.  
Parts to be replaced  
Developer material  
Processing unit (EPU) Transfer/transport unit  
Drum  
Transfer belt unit (TBU)  
Main charger wire  
Main charger grid  
Adjustment item  
Code in mode 05  
2.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor 200, 204, 221  
Adjustment item  
Code in mode 05  
2.3 Adjustment of image quality control/ 879  
Automatic initialization of image  
quality control  
2.4 Adjustment of color registration control 407  
2.5 Image dimensional adjustment  
Items  
2.5.1 Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the registration roller  
2.5.2 Registration motor speed adjustment  
Order  
Code in mode 05  
439-452,492  
406  
400  
470  
401  
474  
402  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2.5.3  
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary-scanning direction  
(b) Primary-scanning data laser writing start position  
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary-scanning direction  
(d)Secondary-scanning laser writing start position  
Printer  
related  
adjustment  
(a) Fine adjustment of fuser motor rotation speed*  
(b) Fine adjustment of registration motor rotation speed*  
410  
–
2.5.4  
8
(a) Image distortion  
Scanner  
related  
adjustment  
9
(b) Image skewing  
–
482  
104  
106, 108  
105  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
(c) Reproduction ratio of primary-scanning direction  
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary-scanning direction  
(e) Image location of primary-scanning direction  
(f) Image location of secondary-scanning direction  
(g) Image trailing edge margin  
428  
*“Fine adjustment of each fuser and registration  
motor rotation speed” should be adjusted after  
printer section related adjustment.  
(
Page. 4-64~68)  
Adjustment item  
2.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
Code in mode 05  
643  
Image quality adjustment  
Items  
2.6.2 Density adjustment  
2.6.3 Color balance adjustment  
2.6.4 Offset amount for processing background  
2.6.5 Judgment threshold for ACS  
2.6.6 AI mode setting  
Code in mode 05  
550 - 589  
779 - 798  
698 - 717  
675  
678, 682  
737 - 746  
2.6.7 Sharpness adjustment  
END  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 1  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor  
2.2.1 Automatic removing of developer material  
Notes: 1. This procedure is not necesary if developer material is not filled at the time of unpacking.  
2. After the developer material has been removed, perform the maintenance of the processing  
unit (EPU) according to "3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)"  
(1) Remove the toner cartridges.  
(2) Remove the processing unit (EPU) from the copier. Turn the knob of the developer removal shutter,  
corresponding to the developer color to be removed, on the rear side of the unit (see the illustration  
below).  
Note: If the knob cannot be turned normally, this message will be displayed during the developer  
removing: " [C33] Developer removal shutter abnormal".  
Developer K  
Color  
Knob  
developers  
(3) Return the processing unit (EPU) to the copier (be sure to fix it with screws) and then close the front  
cover.  
(4) Turn ON the power while digital keys [0] and [5] are pressed simultaneously to dispaly the following  
screen.  
100%  
A
A3  
[0] [5]  
[POWER]  
ৎ
TEST MODE  
(5) Enter a code with digital keys and press the [START] key.ৎThe developer material is removed.  
Code 391 :  
392 :  
All color developer materials (Y,M and C) are removed.  
Only the developer material K is removed.  
Notes: 1. Fully confirm that the developer material to be removed corresponds to the code entered.  
2. If you receive an error message upon completing step (5), the removal shutter of 1 or  
more developer unit(s) is closed. Open the appropriate shutter(s) and repeat step(5).  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) After all developer materials are removed and "READY" is displayed, turn the power OFF.  
Time required for removing Color developer materials only : Approx. 6 min.  
Developer material K only : Approx. 3 min.  
(7) Open the front cover and take out the processing unit (EPU). Turn the knob of the developer removal  
shutter back to the center position.  
(8) Return the processing unit (EPU) to the copier and close the front cover.  
2.2.2 Initialization of the auto-toner senor  
Note: This procedure shall be carried out when no developer material is filled in the processing unit  
(EPU). If material has been filled, follow the procedure of developer material removing in the  
previous heading.  
(1) Open the front cover to install the developer cartridge(s) and then close the front cover.  
(2) Turn ON the power while digital keys [0] and [5] are pressed simultaneously to dispaly the following  
screen.  
100%  
A
A3  
[0] [5]  
[POWER]  
ৎ
TEST MODE  
(3) Enter a code with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
Code 200 : All developer materials  
221 : Color developer materials only  
204 : Developer material K only  
100%  
200  
A3  
(Code) ৎ [START]  
ৎ
TEST MODE  
(4) When the copier starts operating, a message“WAIT”is shown and the developer material filling starts  
(approx.3 min.).  
WAIT  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 3  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Approx. 2 minutes after the developer material filling is finished, the following display appears:  
Ꭾ
ৎ
Y:6.30V M:6.38V C:6.38V K:6.38V  
58%  
Ꭿ ৎ  
Ꭽ
ৎ
Y:4.00V M:4.00V C:4.00V K:4.00V  
Upper line Ꭾ :Current sensor voltages (V)  
Middle line Ꭿ : Humidity (%)  
Lower line Ꭽ :Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltages  
Notes:  
• The current sensor voltages (V) shown in Ꭾ automatically change, gradually approaching the target values  
for adjustment reference voltages shown in Ꭽ.  
• Values are displayed only for the developer materials being filled.  
(6) In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltages (V) in Ꭾ are converged to those in Ꭽ.The humidity  
shown in Ꭿ disappears, and the sensor output control values (bit values) are shown instead.  
Ꭾ
Ꭿ
Ꭽ
ৎ
ৎ
ৎ
Y:4.00V M:4.00V C:4.00V K:4.00V  
Y: 140 M: 140 C: 140 K: 140  
Y:4.00V M:4.00V C:4.00V K:4.00V  
Note: Be careful that the values in Ꭽ, Ꭾ and Ꭿ vary with humidity.  
Ꭽ :Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage  
Humidity (%)  
~29.9  
Y
M
C
K
3.60  
3.84  
4.00  
4.27  
4.50  
3.60  
3.84  
4.00  
4.27  
4.50  
3.50  
3.74  
4.00  
4.27  
4.50  
3.50  
3.74  
4.00  
4.27  
4.50  
30.0~44.9  
45.0~59.9  
60.0~74.9  
75.0~  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ꭾ :Current sensor voltage (V)  
Humidity (%)  
~29.9  
Y
M
C
K
3.55~3.65 3.55~3.65 3.45~3.55 3.45~3.55  
3.79~3.89 3.79~3.89 3.69~3.79 3.69~3.79  
3.95~4.05 3.95~4.05 3.95~4.05 3.95~4.05  
4.22~4.32 4.22~4.32 4.22~4.32 4.22~4.32  
4.45~4.55 4.45~4.55 4.45~4.55 4.45~4.55  
30.0~44.9  
45.0~59.9  
60.0~74.9  
75.0~  
(7) If an adjustment error occurs, values of the color in problem displayed in Ꭽ, Ꭾ or Ꭿ are replaced with  
”.  
“
* * *  
As for properly adjusted colors, press the [INTERRUPT] key to store their adjustment results in  
memory.  
(8) Press the [INTERRUPT] key to store the adjustment results in memory. The screen returns to the  
initial display.  
100%  
A
A3  
[INTERRUPT]  
ৎ
TEST MODE  
(9) Remove the developer cartridge(s).  
(10) Install the toner cartridge(s).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 5  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Troubleshooting in auto-toner sensor adjustment> (measures against adjustment error)  
Check which color is in adjustment error.  
Is the developer unit filled with developer material? (Is the developer cartridge empty?)  
NO  
(1) Check if the shutter seal is removed from the developer cartridge.  
(2) Check the toner motor performance, using the following test modes.  
Y:03-110 ON, 03-160 OFF  
M: 03-111 ON, 03-161 OFF  
C: 03-112 ON, 03-162 OFF  
K: 03-113 ON, 03-163 OFF  
YES  
(3) Check if the developer cartridge gears rotate properly.  
As for the colors completely adjusted, press the [INTERRUPT] key to store their adjustment results in the  
memory. Perform again the adjustment procedure to the color in adjustment error.  
05-245:All developers  
05-247:Developer M  
05-249:Developer K  
05-246:DeveloperY  
05-248:Developer C  
05-250:Color developers  
Is the adjustment completed?  
NO  
(1) Check if the unit is filled with developer material.  
(2) Check if any toner or carrier is stuck on the transfer belt or the drum surface at the  
bottom of the processing unit (EPU).  
NO  
Check the high-voltage contacts.  
• Main charger wire  
• Main charger grid  
• Developer bias  
YES  
Replace disabled parts.  
Replace the processing unit (EPU).  
YES  
Perform the adjustment procedure again.  
Press the [INTERRUPT] key to store the adjustment results in the memory.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control  
(1) At the time of unpacking  
Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the “Automatic initialization of image quality control  
(05-879)”procedure.  
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Automatic initialization of image  
quality control (05-879)”procedure.  
• Processing unit (EPU)  
• Developer material  
• Transfer belt unit (TBU) • Photoconductive drum  
• Laser optical unit • Image quality sensor  
Note: When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, “Automatic initialization of image quality  
control” should be done first.  
(3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases other than the above ones, do the “Forced  
performing of image quality control (05-878)”procedure before "Automatic gamma adjustment".  
Code  
878  
Adjustment item  
Forced performing of  
image quality control  
Contents  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Enter [878] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
(3) When the adjustment finishes normally, the copier will return to  
the adjustment mode’s initial state.  
If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to  
“4.TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
879  
Automatic initialization of  
image quality control  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Enter [879] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
(3) When the adjustment finishes normally, the copier will return to  
the adjustment mode’s initial state.  
If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to  
“4.TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 7  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control  
After having finished the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-879)” procedure,  
perform the "Forced performing of color registration control adjustment (05-407)" procedure.  
Code  
407  
Adjustment item  
Forced performing of  
color registration control  
Contents  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Enter [407] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
(3) When the adjustment finishes normally, the copier will return to  
the adjustment mode’s initial state.  
If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to  
“4.TROUBLESHOOTING”.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 8  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment  
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this  
image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-879)".  
When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.  
Adjustment item  
Code in mode 05  
439 – 452, 492  
406  
ܨ
 Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the registration roller  
ܩ
 Registration motor speed adjustment  
(a) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary-scanning direction  
(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)  
400  
(b) Adjustment of primary-scanning laser writing start position  
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary-scanning direction  
(Fine adjustment of drum motor/transfer belt motor rotation speed)  
(d) Adjustment of secondary-scanning laser writing start position  
470  
401  
474  
402  
410  
–
(a) Fine adjustment of fuser motor rotation speed*  
ܫ
(b) Fine adjustment of registration motorrotation speed*  
(a) Image distortion adjustment  
(b) Image skewing adjustment  
–
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary-scanning direction  
(d) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary-scanning direction  
(e) Image location adjustment of primary-scanning direction  
(f) Image location adjustment of secondary-scanning direction  
(g) Adjustment of image trailing edge margin  
482  
104  
106, 108  
105  
428  
* “Fine adjustment of each fuser and registration motor rotation speed” should be adjusted after printer section  
related adjustment. ( Page. 4-64~68)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 9  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure for entering adjustment values]  
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that  
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [ENERGY  
SAVER] key, immediately after starting the adjustment mode (05), single-sided test copying can be  
performed (normal copy mode).  
Varies with the code “XXX” entered with digital keys.  
<Operation keys>  
<Display>  
100%  
A
A3  
TEST MODE  
0
5
POWER  
1
Code No.  
Digital keys : Enter codes.  
100%  
XXX  
A3  
START  
TEST MODE  
Digital keys : Enter adjustment  
values.  
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)  
YYY  
ZZZ  
Adjustment value newly entered  
(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)  
Current adjustment value  
100%  
A
A
A3  
A3  
SET  
or  
Value ZZZ is stored  
replacing values YYY.  
TEST MODE  
INTERRUPT  
ENERGY  
SAVER  
100%  
Test copy  
Wait Warming Up  
START  
If the test copy does not  
satisfy the specified values,  
return to step 1 and  
repeat the adjustment  
procedure.  
100%  
A
A3  
COPYING  
: Exit the adjustment mode.  
Power OFF/ON  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 10  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5.1 Paper alignment (paper buckle) at the registration roller  
<Operation procedure> (Use codes 439 to 452 and 492 in adjustment mode (05).)  
Copier cassettes  
OHP bypass  
feeding  
Bypass  
feeding  
Thick  
paper2  
Thick  
paper3  
ADU  
LCF  
449  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
cassette cassette cassette cassette  
Long size  
Short size  
439  
440  
441  
442  
443  
444  
445  
446  
447  
448  
450  
451  
452  
492  
Digital keys  
Paper  
source code  
(1)  
Digital keys  
(Enter a new value.)  
0
5
START  
(Current value displayed)  
POWER  
SET  
or  
INTERRUPT  
START )  
( ENERGY SAVER  
(Test copy)  
(Select a paper source)  
Power OFF/ON  
(Stored in memory)  
Transfer void  
(2) Check for any transfer void or“Z”fold.If a trans-  
fer problem is present, try the values in de-  
scending order as “31”ৎ“30”ৎ“29”··· until the  
transfer void disappears. At the same time,  
confirm that any paper jam has not occurred.  
Also, when the aligning amount has been in-  
creased, this may increase the scraping sound  
which occurs when the paper scrapes on the  
mylar sheet as it is transferred by the registra-  
tion roller. If this scraping sound is irritating,  
try reducing the aligning amount.  
“Z” fold  
(3) Do the same for ADU, LCF, bypass feeding,  
thick paper 2, thick paper 3 and OHP bypass  
feeding.  
Note:  
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration section. In  
this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.  
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this could cause the leading edge margin to vary  
adversely. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while checking the  
leading edge margin at the same time.  
If the paper feed roller has prematurely become defective, it is possible to extend its service life, if  
necessary, by increasing the aligning amount, as a temporary measure until a replacement becomes  
available.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 11  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5.2 Registration motor speed adjustment  
The paper transport speed of the registration roller vis-a-vis the image pirnt speed can be set to the  
optimum value.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
(2) Set five sheets of A4-R /LT-R paper into the bypass tray.  
(3) Enter [10] and press the [PRINTER/NETWORK] key to perform the continuous printing of five  
“adjustment charts” from the bypass tray.  
(4) Since the printed sheets of “adjustment charts” are slightly shrunk after being fused, it it required to  
wait one to two minutes to cool them for precise adjustment. Then, set those five sheets again into  
the bypass tray in the same print direction, with the chart face upward.  
(5) Without changing the adjustment mode , enter [406] and press the [START] key.  
While the “adjustment chart” sheets are fed and transported, the pitches in the black belt zone are  
read.  
(6) Step (5) is to be repeated five times automatically.  
The displayed set value does not change until the fourth round and at the fifth round, a newly set value  
is displayed.  
(7) When a newly set value for aligning is displayed at the fifth round, press the [INTERRUPT] key to  
update the set value.  
If error or jam occurs when feeding the adjustment charts, press the [CLEAR] key and perform step  
(2) to step (7) again.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 12  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5.3 Printer section related adjustment  
(a) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary-scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rota-  
tion speed)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1]ৎ[PRINTER/NETWORK].(A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.Use A3/LD from  
the 2nd cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance A from the first grid line at the rear to the 21st of the grid pattern.  
4. Check if the distance A is within 200 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [400] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values: 1209 to 1235) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
ৎ (Enter code [407] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ Forced performing of color registration control  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance A becomes (0.082 %/step = 0.164 mm/step).  
(b) Adjustment of primary-scanning laser writing start position  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1]ৎ[PRINTER/NETWORK].(A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.Use A3/LD from  
the 2nd cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance B from the front edge of the paper to the 1st grid line from the front of the grid  
pattern.  
4. Check if the distance B is within 5 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [470] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).  
ৎ (Enter code [407] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ Forced performing of color registration control  
*The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance B becomes (0.0423 mm/step).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 13  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary-scanning direction (Fine adjustment of drum motor/transfer  
belt motor rotation speed)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1]ৎ[PRINTER/NETWORK].(A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from  
the 2nd cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance C between the 6th (down from the leading edge of the paper) and the 26th grid  
lines of the grid pattern.  
4. Check if the distance C is within 200 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [401] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values: 1608 to 1965) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
ৎ (Enter code [407] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ Forced performing of color registration control  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance C becomes (0.074 %/step = 0.15 mm/step).  
(d) Secondary-scanning laser writing start position adjustment  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Press [1] ৎ [PRINTER/NETWORK].(A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from  
the 2nd cassette.)  
3. Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th grid line of the grid pattern.  
4. Check if the distance D is within 55 0.5 mm or not.  
5. If it is not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 2. to 4. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [474] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values: 1 to 15) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
ৎ (Enter code [407] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ Forced performing of color registration control  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance D becomes (0.6 mm/step).  
Note: The reproduction ratio adjustment and the laser writing start position adjustment in the primary- and  
secondary-scanning directions have a connection as shown below.  
1. When 05-400 is adjusted, 05-401, 402, 403, 404, 410 and 474 are automatically adjusted.  
2. When 05-401 is adjusted, 05-402, 403, 404, 410 and 474 are automatically adjusted.  
3. When 05-406 is adjusted, 05-404 and 410 are automatically adjusted.  
4. When 05-410 is adjusted, 05-404 is automatically adjusted.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 14  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
1
B
A
[Grid pattern]  
<Adjustment order>  
[0] [5] [power ON] ৎ [1] ৎ [PRINTER/NETWORK] (2nd cassette, A3/LD)  
A: 05-400 ৎ 200 0.5 mm (0.164 mm/step) ৎ 05-407  
B: 05-470  
ৎ
5 0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step) ৎ 05-407  
C: 05-401 ৎ 200 0.5 mm (0.15 mm/step) ৎ 05-407  
D: 05-474  
ৎ
55 0.5 mm (0.6 mm/step)  
ৎ 05-407  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 15  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5.4 Scanner related adjustment  
(a) Image distortion adjustment  
Note: The screws on the rear side of mirror-1 and -3 must not be adjusted.  
Feeding direction  
Step 1  
Ꭽ
Ꭾ
Image  
Feeding direction  
Step 2  
൳
Ꭿ
<Procedure>  
Remove the original glass and the left top cover,  
and then move carriage-1 toward the paper exit  
side until it stops. Insert a plus type screwdriver  
through the hole of the indicator unit to adjust the  
screws as per step 1 to step 2 below.  
Mirror-2  
Step 1  
In case of Ꭽ:  
Tighten the mirror-2 adjustment screw (CW).  
ৎ Go to Ꭿ  
In case of Ꭾ:  
Loosen the mirror-2 adjustment screw (CCW).  
ৎ Go to ൳  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 16  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2  
In case of Ꭿ:  
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW).  
ৎ Normal image  
In case of ൳:  
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW).  
ৎ Normal image  
Note: After the image distortion adjustment, when the  
adjustment screws of mirror-1 and -2 are turned,  
lock the adjustment screws using the adhesive  
“BOND-1324” for screw locking .  
Mirror-1  
[Application Method of the Adhesive for the Screw  
Locking]  
(1) Adjust the image distortion.  
(2) Remove the original glass and the indicator unit.  
(3) Move carriage-1 toward the paper exit side.  
(4) Apply the adhesive (BOND-1324) to the adjust-  
ment screws of carriage-1 and -2.  
Note: Application Method  
*Apply good quantity of the adhesive to the “Ap-  
plication area”.  
*The adhesive needs 12 hours to harden com-  
pletely.  
Application area  
Carriage frame  
(5) Confirm that there is no dust or stain on mirror-  
1, -2 or -3 or the shading correction plate.  
(6) Install the indicator unit and the original glass.  
Mirror  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 17  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Image skewing adjustment  
Feeding direction  
Image  
Feeding direction  
Paper  
If the copy image is tilted even when the original is  
placed precisely against the original scale, adjust  
the original scale to correct this problem.  
When the image is tilted as in Ꭽ :  
• Move the original scale in the direction of the  
arrow A  
.
A
B
When the image is tilted as in Ꭾ :  
• Move the original scale in the direction of the  
arrow B  
.
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 18  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following adjustments (c) to (g) should be conducted usingTest Chart No.TCC-1.(Refer to page 2-  
22.)  
(c) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary-scanning (Scanner section)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No.TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] ৎ [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler.  
5. Check if the distance A is within a range of 200 0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [482] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values : 112 to 142) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
ৎ (Enter code [407] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ Forced performing of color registration control  
* The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance A becomes (0.2 mm/step).  
(d) Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary-scanning (Scanner section)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No.TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] ৎ [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance B between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.  
5. Check if the distance B is within a range of 150 0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [104] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values : 1 to 255) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
ৎ (Enter code [407] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ Forced performing of color registration control  
*The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance B becomes(0.23 mm/step).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 19  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(e) Image location adjustment of primary-scanning direction (Scanner section)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No.TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] ৎ [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance C from the left paper edge to the 5 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy with a  
ruler.  
5. Check if the distance C is within a range of 5 0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [106] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values : 5 to 251) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*The larger the adjustment value, the shorter the distance C becomes (0.042 mm/step).  
7. When the distance C is within the acceptable range, perform the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [108] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value with digital keys, deducting 47 from the value set in the 05-106 )  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
(f) Image location adjustment of secondary-scanning direction (Scanner section)  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No.TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] ৎ [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy with  
a ruler.  
5. Check if the distance D is within a range of 10 0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [105] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values : 85 to 171) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*The larger the adjustment value, the longer the distance D becomes (0.12 mm/step).  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 20  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(g) Adjustment of image trailing edge margin  
1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ৎ (Adjustment mode)  
2. Place Test Chart No.TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).  
3. Press [ENERGY SAVER] ৎ [START] to make a copy in the mode of A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/  
photo.  
4. Measure the margin width E on the bottom edge of the copy image with a ruler.  
5. Check if the margin width E is within a range of 2.5 0.5 mm or not.  
6. If it is not, change values using the following procedure, and repeat step 3. to 5. above.  
<Procedure>  
(Adjustment mode) ৎ (Enter code [428] with digital keys) ৎ [START]  
ৎ (Enter a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys)  
ৎ [SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)  
*The larger the adjustment value, the smaller the margin width on the bottom edge becomes (0.042 mm/step).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 21  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
A
[ChartTCC-1]  
<Adjustment order>  
[0][5][Power ON] ৎ (ChartTCC-1) ৎ [ENERGY SAVER] ৎ [START] (A4/LT, 100%, full color and text/photo)  
A: 05-482 ৎ 200 0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step) ৎ 05-407  
B: 05-104 ৎ 150 0.5 mm (0.23 mm/step) ৎ 05-407  
C: 05-106 ৎ 5 0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step)  
D: 05-105 ৎ 10 0.5 mm (0.12 mm/step)  
E: 05-428 ৎ 2.5 0.5 mm (0.042 mm/step)  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 22  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[9]  
[8]  
[1]  
[10]  
[5]  
[3]  
[2]  
[2]  
[3]  
[2]  
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART  
No.TCC-1  
[7]  
[1]  
[1]  
[6]  
[6]  
[4]  
[3]  
[14]  
[11]  
[12]  
[7]  
[7]  
[7]  
[2]  
[13]  
[1]  
[8]  
[1] Grid patterns  
: For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section  
: For checking uniformity  
[2] YMCK patches  
[3] Resolution patterns  
[4] Gradation pattern  
: For checking resolution  
: Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)  
Coverage:10 - 100%  
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance  
: For checking color registration  
[5] Color registration pattern  
[6] Pictures  
: For checking color reproduction and moire  
[7] Magnification lines  
: Forchecking the magnification error of primary- and secondary-scanning  
directions  
[8] Center lines  
[9] Arrow  
: Center lines for A4/LT sizes  
: A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass (place it to  
the left rear corner of the original glass.)  
: For checking uniformity  
[10] Halftone band  
[11] White text on the black solid : For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid  
[12] Text  
: For checking reproduction of text  
[13] Thin lines  
[14] Note area  
: For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width:100µm)  
: For recording the date, conditions, etc.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 23  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6 Image Quality Adjustment  
2.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment  
(1) At the time of unpacking:  
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colorsY, M,  
C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. Check the image, and if  
the gradation reproduction is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below.  
(2) When any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this adjustment:  
• Laser optical unit  
• Photoconductive Drum  
• Developer material  
(3) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to  
determine if adjustment is necessary:  
• Main charger  
• Transfer belt  
Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "2.3 Adjustment of Image  
Quality Control", "2.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control" and "2.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment".  
Code  
643  
Adjustment item  
Automatic gamma  
adjustment  
Contents  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.ৎ  
Adjustment mode  
(2) Select the A3 cassette. Press [4] ৎ [PRINTER/NETWORK]  
key and output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.  
(3) Place the patch chart for adjustment produced in step (2) face  
down on the original glass, with its side, on which a black band  
is present, aligned against the original scale.  
(4) Enter code [643] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs  
automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.).  
(5) When the adjustment has finished normally,“SCAN COMPLETE”  
is shown.Press the [START] key to have the adjustment results  
reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press  
the [STOP] key.)  
Note: After the [START] key is pressed, the printer section will operate  
for about 15 seconds and the density of the standard pattern for image  
quality control will be measured.  
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR”is  
shown. Press the [STOP] key to clear the error display.When it  
is cleared, the control panel display will return to the standby  
state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is  
placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the  
original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 24  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6.2 Density adjustment  
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as  
follows.  
Original mode  
Color  
Printed  
image  
Items to be adjusted  
Remarks  
mode  
Text/photo  
Text  
551  
561  
571  
581  
556  
566  
576  
586  
Photo  
553  
563  
573  
583  
558  
568  
578  
588  
Map  
554  
564  
574  
584  
559  
569  
579  
589  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the “dark” side becomes.  
Manual density  
center value  
550  
552  
562  
572  
582  
557  
567  
577  
587  
Manual density  
“dark” step value  
Manual density  
“light” step value  
560  
The larger the value, the lighter  
the “light” side becomes.  
570  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the “dark” side becomes.  
580  
Automatic density  
Manual density  
center value  
555  
Manual density  
“dark” step value  
Manual density  
“light” step value  
565  
The larger the value, the lighter  
the “light” side becomes.  
575  
The larger the value, the  
darker the image becomes.  
585  
Automatic density  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Enter the code of required mode (color mode, original mode, item to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Enter an adjustment value with digital keys (acceptable values: 0 to 255).  
(To correct an entered value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(4) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value. ৎ The copier goes back to the standby  
state.  
(5) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 25  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6.3 Color balance adjustment  
Original mode  
Item to be  
adjusted  
Text/  
Remarks  
Printed  
image  
Text  
Photo  
Map  
photo  
The larger the value,  
the darker the color to  
be adjusted becomes.  
Acceptable values: 0  
to 255.  
Adjustment code  
Sub-code  
779  
0
780  
0
781  
0
782  
0
783  
0
Yellow  
Low density  
Medium density  
High density  
Magenta  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Adjustment code  
Sub-code  
784  
0
785  
0
786  
0
787  
0
788  
0
Low density  
Medium density  
High density  
Cyan  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Adjustment code  
Sub-code  
789  
0
790  
0
791  
0
792  
0
793  
0
Low density  
Medium density  
High density  
Black  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Adjustment code  
Sub-code  
794  
0
795  
0
796  
0
797  
0
798  
0
Low density  
Medium density  
High density  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “2.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Enter the code of required mode (color mode, original mode, item to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] key.  
0 : Low density (L) 1 : Medium density (M) 2 : High density (H)  
(4) Enter an adjustment value with digital keys.  
(To correct an entered value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(5) Press the [SET] key to have the value memorized. ৎ Returns to the display in step (3).  
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (3) to (5).  
(7) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value in memory. ৎ The copier goes back to the  
standby state.  
(8) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(9) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (8).  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 26  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6.4 Offset adjustment for background processing  
The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.  
Original mode  
Color  
Printed  
image  
Item to be adjusted  
Remarks  
mode  
Text/photo  
Text  
699  
709  
704  
714  
Photo  
701  
Map  
702  
712  
707  
717  
The larger the value, the darker  
the background becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the text becomes.  
Density adjustment  
for background  
Density adjustment  
for text  
698  
700  
710  
705  
715  
708  
711  
The larger the value, the darker  
the background becomes.  
The larger the value, the darker  
the text becomes.  
Density adjustment  
for background  
Density adjustment  
for text  
703  
706  
713  
716  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Enter the code of required mode (color mode, original mode, item to be adjusted) with digital keys and  
press the [START] key.  
(3) Enter an adjustment value with digital keys.  
(To correct an entered value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(4) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value in memory. ৎ The copier goes back to the  
standby screen.  
(5) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).  
2.6.5 Judgment threshold for ACS  
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is  
black-and-white or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto color”is selected in  
the color mode.  
Code  
675  
Adjustment item  
Judgment threshold  
for ACS  
Contents  
The larger the value, the more an original tends to be judged to be  
black-and-white, and the smaller the value, the more it tends to be  
judged to be color.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 27  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6.6 AI mode setting  
(a) AI mode discrimination setting  
Select the discrimination level in the AI mode as follows:  
Code  
678  
Adjustment item  
AI mode  
Contents  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
(2) Enter code [678] with digital keys.  
(3) Enter a setting value:  
discrimination setting  
0: Standard (for regular)  
1: Photograph priority  
2: Only judgment of original type  
3: Only judgment of original type with photograph priority  
4: No AI discrimination  
(4) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key to store the setting value.  
(b) AI mode time-out setting  
Set the maximum processing time allowable in the AI mode.  
Note: In case discrimination does not finish within specified time, AI mode discrimination stops and copy operation  
is performed in the selected copy mode.  
Two kinds of setting are made;one for originals of A4/LT or smaller sizes, and the other for originals larger  
than A4/LT.  
Code  
682  
Adjustment item  
AI mode  
time-out setting  
Contents  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
(2) Enter code [682] with digital keys.  
(3) Enter a setting value:  
The setting value should be in two digits; the first digit is the  
time-out period for A3/LD original size while the second digit is  
the time-out period (seconds) for A4/LT original size.Both digits  
should be in the range of 1 to 9. However, time is set in proportion  
to original sizes for originals larger than A4/LT, based on A4/LT  
and A3/LD setting value.  
(4) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key to store the setting value.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 28  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6.7 Sharpness adjustment  
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjustment  
can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.  
Code  
737  
738  
739  
740  
741  
742  
743  
744  
745  
746  
Color mode  
Full color  
Original mode  
Text/photo  
Text  
Contents  
• The larger the value, the sharper the image  
becomes; while the smaller the value, the softer the  
image becomes.  
Printed image  
Photo  
• The smaller the value, the less moire tends to  
appear.  
Map  
Black  
Text/photo  
Text  
• The acceptable values are 0 to 31.  
The center value is 16.  
Printed image  
Photo  
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.  
Note: You have to make adjustment by compromising  
between moire and sharpness.  
Map  
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-  
ment using the following procedure.  
<Procedure>  
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
(2) Enter the code of required mode (color mode or original mode) with digital keys and press the [START]  
key.  
(3) Enter an adjustment value with digital keys.  
(To correct an entered value, press the [CLEAR] key.)  
(4) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key to store the value in memory. ৎ The copier goes back to the  
standby state.  
(5) Press the [ENERGY SAVER] key and then press the [START] key to make a test copy.  
(6) If the desired image sharpness has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 29  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.7 High-VoltageTransformer Settings  
2.7.1 Overview  
This machine uses four main high-voltage transformers for charging/development/discharging and one  
transfer transformer for transfer/suction.  
The main high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-M-314) are used each for one of the colorsY, M, C and K,  
giving a total of four units.  
The transfer transformer (PS-HVT-TB-310) supplies high-voltage for the transfer rollersY, M, C and K and  
the suction charger to be used in black mode.  
The main high-voltage transformers have the following high-voltage outputs.  
CH1: main charger wire  
CH2:main charger grid bias  
CH3:developer bias  
CH4:cleaning blade bias  
The transfer transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.  
CH1:transfer roller bias (Y)  
CH2:transfer roller bias (M)  
CH3:transfer roller bias (C)  
CH4:transfer roller bias (K)  
CH5: suction charger  
* CH5 is used in black mode only.  
Note: The main high-voltage transformer and transfer transformer for service parts are supplied with the  
data sheets to be used for the following setup. Be careful not to lose them.  
Output adjustment is performed when the devices are shipped, so under any circumstances, do  
not move the fixed volumes of resistors.  
2.7.2 Settings after replacing main high-voltage transformers  
After replacing a main high-voltage transformer, be sure to enter the data shown on the supplementary data  
sheet (main charger grid bias and developer bias) according to the procedure below.  
<Settings for main charger grid bias>  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Enter code 252 and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The lower limit value for main charger grid bias is displayed for eachY, M, C and K.  
(3) Enter the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press the [START] key.  
(4) Enter a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 30  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Enter code [253] and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The upper limit value for main charger grid bias is displayed for eachY, M, C and K.  
(6) Enter the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press the [START] key.  
(7) Enter a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(8) Turn the power OFF.  
< Settings for developer bias >  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Enter code [257] and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The lower limit value for developer bias is displayed for eachY, M, C and K.  
(3) Enter sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press the [START] key.  
(4) Enter a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(5) Enter code [258] and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The upper limit value for developer bias is displayed for eachY, M, C and K.  
(6) Enter the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press the [START] key.  
(7) Enter a value according to the supplementary data sheet and press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
(8) Turn the power OFF.  
2.7.3 Settings after replacing transfer transformer  
After replacing a transfer transformer, be sure to enter the data shown on the supplementary data sheet  
(transfer bias) according to the procedure below.  
<Settings for transfer bias>  
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.  
(2) Enter code [367] and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The lower limit value for transfer bias is displayed for eachY, M, C and K.  
(3) Enter the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press the [START] key.  
(4) Enter a value according to the supplementary data sheet, and press [SET] or [INTERRUPT].  
* Perform the operation in steps (3) and (4) for each ofY, M, C and K.  
(5) Enter code [368] and press the [START] key.  
ৎ The upper limit value for transfer bias is displayed for eachY, M, C and K.  
(6) Enter the sub-code (0:Y, 1: M, 2: C, 3: K) and press the [START] key.  
(7) Enter a value according to the supplementary data sheet, and press [SET] or [INTERRUPT].  
* Perform the operation in steps (6) and (7) for each ofY, M, C and K.  
(8) Turn the power OFF.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 31  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.8 Adjustment of the Developer Unit  
2.8.1 Doctor-to-Sleeve Gap  
Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig  
Adjusting procedure :  
(1) Remove the developer unit from the process-  
ing unit (EPU), and then remove the developer  
unit cover and toner-scattering prevention seal  
holder from the developer unit.  
Developer unit  
cover  
Toner-scattering  
prevention seal holder  
(2) Loosen the 2 screws for fixing the doctor blade  
(M3), and insert the gauge“0.65”of the jig into  
the gap between the developer sleeve and the  
doctor blade to adjust the gap.  
Screws  
Doctor  
blade  
Fasten the screws for fixing the doctor blade  
after adjusting.  
Gauge “0.65” of the  
doctor-sleeve jig  
Developer sleeve  
(3) Insert the gauge “0.60” of the jig into the gap  
between the sleeve and the doctor, and make  
sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the  
front৏ৎrear direction.In addition, confirm that  
the gauge “0.70” cannot be inserted into the  
gap.  
Gauge “0.60” of the doctor-  
sleeve jig  
Notes :  
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade, insert  
the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the doctor blade.  
2. While reinstalling the toner-scattering prevention seal holder, insert the slide hooks securely.  
3. After reinstalling the toner-scattering prevention seal holder, make sure that each of the side mylar  
sheets (on the front and rear) is between the 2 urethane rubber sheets.  
4. While reinstalling the developer unit cover, fit the latches securely.  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 32  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section  
2.9.1 Carriages  
(a) Installing carriage drive wires  
When replacing the carriage drive wires with new wires, proceed as illustrated below:  
[Front side]  
Wire pulley  
Carriage-1  
Carriage-2  
Hook  
Tension spring  
Wire guide  
Idle pulley  
[Rear side]  
Wire pulley  
Carriage-1  
Carriage-2  
Hook  
Tension spring  
Wire guide  
Idle pulley  
Notes:1. Since the carriage drive wires are applied with proper tension by tension springs, there is no  
need for tension adjustment.  
2. Check that the wire tension is identical for both front and rear wires and is properly applied.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 33  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Adjusting the positions of carriage-1 and -2  
1. Loosen 2 screws (on the front and rear) which  
are fixing carriage-1 to the wires, and another 1  
screw (on the front) which is fixing carriage-2 to  
the wires.  
Carriage jigs  
Carriage-1  
2. Move carriage-2 to the exit side. Insert the car-  
riage jigs into the jig-insertion holes, one on each  
side (front and rear) of carriage-2, and fasten the  
screw on the front side of carriage-2.  
Rail  
Carriage-2  
3. While placing the protruding parts of carriage-1  
against the carriage jigs, fasten 2 screws on front  
and rear sides to fix the carriage-1 to the wire on  
both front and rear sides.  
4. Pull out the carriage jigs.  
[Rear side]  
[Front side]  
Carriage-1  
Carriage-1  
fixing screw  
Carriage-1  
fixing screw  
Carriage jig  
Carriage jig  
Carriage-2  
End  
End  
End  
Carriage-2  
fixing screw  
Letter "R"  
written  
Projection  
Letter "F"  
written  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 34  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(c) Installing the carriage drive wires to the wire pulleys  
Winding the wire to the wire pulleys:  
1. Fit the 3-mm ball terminal in the center of the  
wire into the hole of the wire pulley. The wire  
should be positioned so that the hook at its end  
faces upward with its crimped side.  
Ball terminal  
2. Wind the wires onto the wire pulleys on the front  
and rear.The number of turns to be wound are as  
follows (see the illustrations below):  
Wire pulley  
· One turn on the inside of the boss.  
· Six turns on the outside of the boss.  
After winding the wires on the pulleys, fix the  
wires with wire holder jigs to prevent them from  
unwinding.  
[Front side]  
[Rear side]  
Ball terminal  
1 turn  
Pulley (front)  
Boss  
1 turn  
Pulley (rear)  
Hook  
Ball terminal  
6 turns  
6 turns  
Hook  
Boss  
(Front)  
Wire pulley  
Hooks  
Wires  
Ball terminals  
(Rear)  
Wire holder jig  
Wire pulley  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 35  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes :  
1. When winding the wires on the pulleys,  
take the following precautions:  
· Do not wind the wire on the pulley with  
the wire twisted.  
No gap should exist.  
· Wind the wire strongly so that all the  
turns of the wire are in firm contact with  
the surface of the pulley.  
· Each time you wind a turn on the pulley,  
push it to the preceding turn so that all  
the turns are closely wound.  
e.g. Front side  
2. When fitting wire holder jigs, take care so  
that the turns wound on the pulleys do not  
move or unwind.  
<Relationship between wound turns and wire holder jigs>  
3-mm ball  
terminal  
Front side  
Rear side  
Wire holder jigs  
Wire holder jig  
Pulley  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 36  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9.2 Lens unit  
(a) Replacing the lens unit  
· Since the lens unit was precisely adjusted at the factory, it must not be readjusted in the field or some of  
its components must not be replaced. If necessary, the lens unit should be replaced as a unit.  
· While replacing with a new lens unit, never loosen or remove the six screws indicated with arrows below.  
They are locked with adhesive.  
· Use sufficient care when handling the lens unit. Never hold the precision-adjusted area of the lens unit.  
Adjusted area  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 37  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Installing the lens unit  
Use the positioning pins to install the lens unit. By that the installing position of the lens unit is fixed,  
and therefore there is no need to adjust the magnification ratio of the lens.  
<Procedure>  
1. Insert the positioning pins (front and rear)into the holes of the lens unit (as A in the illustration below),  
and install the unit to the base of the scanner unit (note that the shapes of the front positioning pins are  
different from that of the rear ones).  
2. Fix the 2 long holes (as B in the illustration below) with the screws.  
A (Front)  
B
A (Rear)  
B
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 38  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System  
2.10.1 Cassette sidewise deviation  
(1) Loosen 5 screws for fixing the cassette front cover, and the sidewise deviation can be adjusted toward  
the front or the rear by a maximum of 3 mm.  
(2) If the image is shifted toward the rear of paper, adjust the cassette front cover toward the front by the  
amount of the shift, and fasten the screws.  
(3) If the image is shifted toward the front of paper, adjust the cassette front cover toward the rear by the  
amount of the shift, and fasten the screws.  
Left side  
Right side  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 39  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.11 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)  
To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the copier.  
Key copy  
counter  
MU-8  
Counter socket  
MU-10  
<Installation procedure>  
Socket attachment screw holes  
(1) Remove the rear cover.  
Harness  
connector  
(2) Remove the feed side upper cover, and cut open  
the window for the key copy counter.  
(3) Pull out the harness connector from the hole  
of the machine frame, and cut the short harness  
of the connector.(Treat the cut harness properly  
to avoid it causing a short-circuit with the  
machine frame.)Then, disconnect the dummy  
connector.  
Dummy  
connector  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
2 - 40  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Connect the connector of the counter socket  
to the harness connector of the copier side.  
(5) Install the counter socket to the machine frame  
with two M3 screws.  
Socket  
connector  
Connector of the  
copier side  
M3 screws  
(6) Reinstall the feed side upper cover and the rear  
cover.  
(7) Insert the key copy counter with its arrow mark  
facing up and pointing toward the copier.  
(8) Enter the value “3” in the setting mode (08-  
202).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
2 - 41  
FC-210/310 ADJUSTMENT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)  
3. 1 Types of Preventive Maintenance  
The following two types of preventive maintenance should be performed:  
Note: Values of the sheets correspond to the FC-210/FC-310.  
(1) General maintenance (General PM)  
General maintenance should be performed based on the value of the general PM counter (08-857).  
This maintenance, which covers the black developer unit as well as the entire machine, should be  
conducted in conjunction with the replacement cycle (every 40/60K sheets) of the black developer  
material.  
(2) Color maintenance (Color PM)  
Color maintenance should be performed based on the value of the color PM counter (08-897).  
This maintenance, which is performed with a focus on the color developer units, should be conducted  
in conjunction with the replacement cycle (every 40/60K sheets) of the color developer materials.  
The cycle (counter value) of color maintenance is determined by the ratio of color printouts to black  
printouts, as shown by the following table, "Variation in PM cycles due to color/black printout ratios".  
Variation in PM cycles due to color/black printout ratios  
Color  
100%  
90%  
80%  
70%  
60%  
50%  
Black  
0%  
GeneralPM(sheets)  
40.0 / 60.0K  
40.0 / 60.0K  
40.0 / 60.0K  
40.0 / 60.0K  
40.0 / 60.0K  
40.0 / 60.0K  
ColorPM(sheets)  
40.0 / 60.0K  
44.4 / 66.7K  
50.0 / 75.0K  
57.1 / 85.7K  
66.7 / 100.0K  
80.0 / 120.0K  
10%  
20%  
30%  
40%  
50%  
* Therefore, parts replacing , cleaning and lubrication for the paper feeding system, scanner section,  
transfer/transport unit, fuser unit,etc. should all be performed in conjunction with the replacement  
cycle of the black developer material.  
e.g.) Replacing thelowerheatroller : At the 1st cycle of replacing black developer material  
(40/60K copies)  
Replacing the transfer belt : At the 3rd cycle (FC-210) /2nd cycle (FC-310) of replacing black  
developer material  
(120/120K copies)  
* For the details of maintenance items, refer to the checklist described later.  
* Yields are based on factory defaults.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 1  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. 2 Outline of the Maintenance Order  
(1) Preparation  
a. Discuss current machine conditions with the key operator and note them down.  
b. Before starting maintenance, make a few sample copies byTCC-1 chart and keep them for later  
reference purposes.  
c. Turn OFF the power switch, and be sure to unplug the copier.  
(2) Perform preventive maintenance following the checklist shown below. During maintenance, refer to  
the illustrations attached and the Service Manual as required.  
(3) After having finished the maintenance, plug in the copier, turn ON the power switch, and make a few  
copies to confirm that the copier is working normally.  
3. 3 Preventive Maintenance Checklist  
Symbols used in the checklist  
Cleaning  
Lubrication  
White grease Values indicate the  
(Molykoat) replacement cycle.  
Replacement  
Operation check  
After cleaning  
or replacing,  
check for no  
Date  
User’s name  
Serial No.  
Inspector’s  
name  
W
A
Cleaning with alcohol  
Cleaning with soft pad,  
cloth or vacuum cleaner  
AV Alvania No.2 (Value x 1000 sheets)  
abnormality.  
Replace if  
deformed or  
damaged  
Remarks  
Notes: 1. Values under “Cleaning” and “Replacement” indicate the cleaning and replacement cycles for the FC-  
210/310.  
2. Lubricate every 40,000 sheets for FC-210 and 60,000 sheets for FC-310. Lubricate to the replacement  
parts according to the replacement cycle.  
3. Do not stain any oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys.  
4. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section depends on the number of sheets fed from  
each paper source.  
5. <P-I> under “Remarks” indicates page and item number in the Parts List.  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Maintenance Checklist  
Replace- Opera-  
Cleaning Lubri-  
(X 1000) cation  
Remarks Reference  
Section  
Item to inspect  
ment  
tion  
<P-I>  
counter  
(X 1000) check  
40/60  
1. Developer material  
2. Doctor blade  
*8  
*1  
*9  
*2  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
AV  
Developer K  
counter  
3. Developer unit drum seal  
4. Front/rear sides of developer unit  
5. Oil seal portion  
(08-847)  
6. Drum cleaning blade  
40/60  
*3  
<P23-I13>  
*4  
7. Recovery blade  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
Processing 8. Felt seals on both ends  
unit (EPU)  
of the cleaning blade  
9. Entire developer/cleaner unit  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
*7  
*6  
(Only Black 10. Main charger case  
related parts) 11. Discharge LED  
12. Wire cleaning pad  
Drum K  
life counter  
40/60  
40/60  
<P22-I16> (08-843)  
*6  
13. Main charger wire  
<P22-I15> Note:  
<P22-I24> Clear "Drum  
K drive cou-  
14. Main charger grid  
15. Main charger contact  
16. Drum  
40/60  
40/60  
(40/60)  
ch.3.6.2 nter(08-870)"  
<P22-I38> when drum  
has been  
17. Drum shaft  
18. Drum thermistor  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
replaced.  
19. Toner recovery auger drive  
20. Toner cartridge drive gear  
21. Ozone filter  
(40/60)  
W
W
40/60  
40/60  
*5  
Around EPU  
<P6-I37>  
Key-operator’s  
item  
area  
22. Toner bag  
23. Fuser belt  
<P33-I33>  
ch.3.6.6  
40/60  
<P28-I24>  
24. Upper heat roller  
25. Fuser roller  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
40/60  
40/60  
40/60  
40/60  
40/60  
ch.3.6.5  
<P28-I17> Fuser unit  
ch.3.6.6 counter  
<P27-I14> (08-854)  
<P28-I16>  
Fuser unit 26. Lower heat roller  
27. Belt guide  
28. Separation guide  
29. Separation fingers  
*10  
<P28-I28>  
ch.3.6.7  
30. Oil roller  
<P28-I44>  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 3  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replace- Opera-  
Cleaning Lubri-  
(X 1000) cation  
Remarks Reference  
Section  
Item to inspect  
ment  
tion  
<P-I>  
counter  
(X 1000) check  
40/60  
31. Cleaning roller  
32. Upper thermistors  
ch.3.6.7  
<P28-I45>  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A
Fuser unit  
counter  
Fuser unit 33. Lower thermistors  
34. Fuser inlet guide  
(08-854)  
35. Fuser exit guide  
36. Paper exit roller  
Image quality 37. Image quality sensor’s area  
control  
(40/60)  
*11  
Drum K  
Color  
38. Color registration sensor  
(40/60)  
life counter  
(08-843)  
registration  
Laser unit 39. Slit glass  
40. Pick-up roller  
(40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
A (40/60)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
90  
90  
<P14-I13>  
<P17-I52>  
41. Feed roller  
42. Separation roller  
43. Bypass pick-up roller  
Paper feeding 44. Bypass feed roller  
system  
45. Bypass separation roller  
46. Registration roller  
47. Paper guide  
—
48. Paper dust removal brush  
49. Drive gears (tooth face)  
50. Registration unit support bushings  
51. Original glass  
W
W
or A (40/60)  
or A (40/60)  
(40/60)  
52. Platen cover  
53. Mirror-1  
54. Mirror-2  
(40/60)  
55. Mirror-3  
(40/60)  
Scanner 56. Reflector  
57. Lens  
(40/60)  
—
(40/60)  
58. Exposure lamp  
59. Original-width indicator  
60. Automatic original detection unit  
61. Slide sheet  
62. Air filter  
(40/60)  
63. Transfer belt  
120/120  
120/120  
120/120  
120/120  
<P30-I2>  
Transfer/ 64. Transfer roller (Y, M, C, K)  
transport 65. Drive roller cleaning felt  
<P30-I22>  
<P30-I27> Transfer belt  
<P30-I46> unit counter  
(08-853)  
unit  
66. Transfer belt cleaning blade  
67. Transfer belt recovery blade  
68. Transfer belt drive roller  
69. Transfer belt driven roller  
(TBU)  
(120/120)  
(120/120)  
(120/120)  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Maintenance Checklist  
Replace- Opera-  
Cleaning Lubri-  
(X 1000) cation  
Remarks Reference  
Section  
Item to inspect  
ment  
tion  
<P-I>  
counter  
(X 1000) check  
40/60  
1. Developer material (Y,M,C)  
2. Doctor blade  
*8  
*1  
*9  
*2  
DeveloperY,  
M,C counter  
(08-844,845,  
846)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
AV  
3. Developer unit drum seal  
4. Front/rear sides of developer unit  
5. Oil seal portion  
6. Drum cleaning blade  
40/60  
*3  
<P23-I13>  
*4  
7. Recovery blade  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
Processing 8. Felt seals on both ends  
DrumY,M,C  
life counter  
(08-840,841,  
842)  
unit (EPU)  
of the cleaning blade  
9. Entire developer/cleaner unit  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
*7  
*6  
(Color(Y,M,C) 10. Main charger case  
related parts) 11. Discharge lamp  
12. Wire cleaning pad  
40/60  
40/60  
<P22-I16> Note:  
13. Main charger wire  
*6  
Clear "Drum  
<P22-I15> Y,M,C drive  
<P22-I24> counter (08-  
867,868,  
14. Main charger grid  
15. Main charger contact  
16. Drum  
40/60  
40/60  
(40/60)  
ch.3.6.2 869)" when  
<P22-I38> drums have  
been re-  
17. Drum shaft  
18. Drum thermistor (Y)  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
placed.  
19. Toner recovery auger drive  
Image quality 37. Image quality sensor’s area  
control  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
W
*11  
Color  
38. Color registration sensor  
(40/60)  
(40/60)  
registration  
Laser unit 39. Slit glass  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 5  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5554 53 56 58 59 51 61  
37 60 57  
39  
38  
60  
62  
48  
46  
44  
43  
21  
24  
27  
32  
31  
30  
23  
25  
28  
45  
36  
35  
29  
26  
34  
33  
47  
46, 50  
48  
69  
41  
42  
40  
40  
41  
42  
67  
68  
40  
41  
42  
22  
66 65  
64 63  
[Front sectional view]  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12,13  
12,13  
12,13  
11  
12,13  
11  
11  
11  
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
10, 15  
10, 15  
10, 15  
10, 15  
3
3, 18  
3
3, 18  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
19  
8, 6 14 17 16  
7
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
Developer unit K  
Developer unit C  
Developer unit M  
Developer unit Y  
[Processing unit (EPU)]  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 7  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
49  
[Front side drive system]  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 8  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* Notes on the Preventive Maintenance Checklist  
* 1. Doctor blade cleaning  
Note: This cleaning should be done subsequent to “Automatic removing of developer material”.  
(1) Move the developer removal shutter lever in  
the direction of the arrow shown to close the  
developer removal opening.  
(2) Remove the developer unit from the EPU.  
(3) Remove the developer unit cover. Insert the  
doctor blade cleaning jig between the doctor  
blade and the sleeve and move the jig back  
and forth along the edge 3 times to clean the  
doctor blade.  
(4) After the cleaning, return the developer removal  
shutter lever to open the developer removal  
opening (move the lever in a direction reverse  
to (1)).  
(5) Making the developer removal opening point  
downward, remove the developer material re-  
maining in the developer unit. (Shake the de-  
veloper unit to the right and left, and rotate  
the mixer and the sleeve alternately.)  
Developer material  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 9  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*2 Front/rear sides of developer unit  
Clean off any toner accumulating on the developer sleeve ends indicated with arrows and in the area  
beneath the scattered toner recovery roller.  
*3 Cleaning blade  
If poor cleaning has occurred due to such causes as adhesion of paper dust, etc. prior to the specified  
number of printouts for replacement, replace the cleaning blade as required because the blade edge  
may have been damaged.  
*4 Recovery blade  
If the blade edge has been marred, replace the blade regardless of the number of printouts that have  
been made so far.  
*5 Ozone filter  
If the ozone filter is heavily dirty, replace it.  
*6 Main charger case and charger wire  
To clean the inside of the main charger case and the charger wire, use a cloth which should be soaked  
in water and then wrung lightly.  
*7 Developer unit and cleaner unit  
Check if the outside surfaces including the bottom surfaces are dirty, and clean if necessary.  
*8 Developer material  
When the developer material is replaced, be sure to perform "automatic adjustment of the auto-  
toner sensor" (adjustment mode 05-200, 204, 221).  
*9 Drum seal  
Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung strongly to clean the front seal.  
*10 Separation fingers  
Replace the finger if its tip is damaged, regardless of the specified number of printouts for replace-  
ment. If toner is fused tightly on the tip, the tip may be damaged if you try to scrape the toner off  
forcefully. So, replace it that is heavily dirty with toner.  
*11 Image quality sensor's area  
Clean the shutter of the image quality sensor and around it. Don't touch the sensor head inside the  
shutter.  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 10  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. 4 PM Kit  
No. of printouts for  
replacement cycle  
Kit name  
Breakdown of kits  
Part name  
Q'ty  
1. Developer material Y  
1. Developer material M  
1. Developer material C  
1. Developer material K  
PS-ZDFC31Y  
PS-ZDFC31M  
PS-ZDFC31C  
PS-ZDFC31K  
JIG-CLEAN-DOC  
BL-FC22D  
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
6
1
1
1
4
1
1
DEV-KIT-FC31  
(40/60K kit)  
40/60K  
40/60K  
–
Doctor blade cleaning jig  
6. Drum cleaning blade  
EPU-KIT-FC31 12. Charger wire cleaning pad  
K-WIRE-CLN-ARM  
WIRE-CH-310  
GRID-CH-314  
K-FILTER-OZN  
BT-FC31FU  
(40/60K kit)  
13. Main charger wire  
14. Main charger grid  
21. Ozone filter  
23. Fuser belt  
25. Fuser roller  
FR-FC31FU  
HR-FC31-L  
FU-KIT-FC31  
(40/60K kit)  
26. Lower heat roller  
27. Belt guide  
STOP-FU-BELT-HR  
SCRAPER-PRS-213  
SR-FC31U  
40/60K  
28. Separation finger  
29. Oil roller  
30. Cleaning roller  
62. Transfer belt  
B-FC31U  
BT-FC22TR  
TBU-KIT-FC31 63. Transfer roller  
(120/120K kit) 64. Drive roller cleaning felt  
65. Transfer belt cleaning blade  
CR-FC31TR  
FP-FC22TR  
BL-FC22TR  
120/120K  
* The numbers in the “Breakdown of kits” column above correspond with the numbers in the Preventive  
Maintenance Checklist.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 11  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. 5 List of AdjustmentTools  
Parts List  
Page  
Name  
Item  
1
Door switch keep-ON jig  
Wire holder jig  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
2
Doctor - sleeve gap adjustment jig  
Cleaning brush  
3
6
Doctor blade cleaning jig  
Test chart (No. TCC-1)  
7
9
Scanner carriage jig (front)  
Scanner carriage jig (rear)  
Lens unit positioning pin (front)  
Lens unit positioning pin (rear)  
Fuser belt replacing jig  
10A  
10B  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Downloading jig (DLM board)  
Downloading jig (DLS board)  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 12  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6 Precautions for Storing/Handling Supplies and Parts  
3.6.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies  
A.Toner and developer  
Toner and developer should be stored in a shaded place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to  
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.  
B. Photoconductive drum  
Like toner and developer, Photoconductive drums should be stored in a dark place where the ambient  
temperature is between 10 to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be  
subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.  
C. Drum cleaning blade, transfer belt cleaning blade  
Blades should be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface where the ambient temperature is between 10 to  
35°C, and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas.  
D.Transfer belt, transfer roller, fuser belt, fuser roller, lower heat roller  
Avoid places where the belts and rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical  
gas.  
E.Oil roller, cleaning roller  
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or chemical gas. They  
should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.  
F.Copy paper  
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.  
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.  
3.6.2 Checking and cleaning of the photoconductive drum  
(1) Use of gloves  
If fingerprints or oil stain the OPC drum surface, the characteristics of the photoconductor may degrade,  
affecting the quality of the image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare hands.  
(2) Handling precautions  
As the OPC drum surface is very delicate, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and  
removing it so as not to damage its surface.  
When the drum is replaced with a new one, be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface  
of the new drum before installing. After installing, the drum counter corresponding to the replaced durm  
must be cleared to 0 (zero) by operating the setting mode (08 - 867~870).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 13  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and the cleaning blade. If the  
application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and the cleaning blade may be damaged.  
2. When some fibers adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and, in addition,  
may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade.  
(3) Handling at installing of the copier and replacing of the drum  
At installing the copier and replacing the drum, do not leave the drum in a brightly lit place for a long time.  
Otherwise, the drum will be fatigued, producing some background fogging on the image after being installed  
in the copier. However, this effect will decrease as time elapses.  
(4) Cleaning of the drum  
At preventive maintenance, wipe softly the entire surface of the drum using the designated cleaning  
cotton (dry soft pad). Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton so as not to touch the drum surface inad-  
vertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting cleaning  
work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.  
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or silicone oil as they will have an adverse effect on the drum.  
Never use selenium refresher, either.  
(5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface  
If the surface is scratched to such a degree that the aluminum base is exposed, black spots or streaks will  
be produced on images and can also damage the cleaning blade. So, replace the drum with a new one.  
(6) Recovery of used photoconductive drums  
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used drums, you should follow your relevant local regulations  
and rules.  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 14  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6.3 Checking and cleaning of the drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade  
(1) Handling precautions  
Since the edge of the cleaning blade performs the cleaning operation, pay special attention when handling  
it:  
• Do not allow any hard object to hit or rub against the blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a cloth or  
soft pad.  
• Do not stain the edge with any oil or fingerprints, etc.  
• Do not allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch the blade.  
• Do not leave any lint or dirt on the blade edge.  
• Do not place the blade near a heat source.  
(2) Cleaning procedure  
Clean the blade edge lightly with a cloth moistened with water.  
3.6.4 Checking and replacing the transfer belt  
(1) Handling precautions  
• Do not touch the belt surface with your bare hands.  
• Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the belt surface.  
• Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to come into contact with the transfer belt.  
• Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.  
3.6.5 Checking and replacing the transfer roller and fuser roller  
(1) Handling precautions  
• Do not touch the roller surface with your bare hands.  
• Be carefull not to leave any scratch or dent on the roller surface.  
3.6.6 Checking and cleaning of the fuser belt and lower heat roller  
(1) Handling precautions  
Fuser belt  
• Take great care not to let the belt surface be folded.  
• Do not touch the belt surface with your bare hands.  
• Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the belt surface.  
• Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to come into contact with the fuser belt.  
• Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
3 - 15  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower heat roller  
• Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the lower heat roller.  
• Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the lower heat roller, or it may be damaged,  
possibly resulting in poor cleaning.  
(2) Checking  
• Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and lower heat roller and clean if necessary.  
• Clean the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.  
• Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.  
• Check the thermistors for proper contact with the upper and lower heat rollers.  
• Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.  
• Check the gap between the inlet guide and lower heat roller.  
• Check the fuser belt for proper transportation.  
• Check the lower heat roller for proper rotation.  
(3) Cleaning procedure for fuser belt and lower heat roller  
When fuser belt and lower heat roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe the  
surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and roller while they are still warm.  
Note:  
Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and lower heat roller surface with your nails or hard objects because it can be  
easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and lower heat roller.  
(4) Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit  
After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded nor damaged.  
A folded or damaged belt may be broken when it is in use.  
3.6.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller  
(1) Handling precautions  
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the oil/cleaning rollers.  
(2) Poor cleaning and corrective treatment  
Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser belt surface.  
When its surface is stained with toner, examine the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily adhered  
on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/cleaning rollers should  
be replaced with new ones.  
The oil/cleaning rollers are gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser belt over a long  
period of time. Replace them after the specified number of printouts have been made.  
FC-210/310 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE  
3- 16  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. TROUBLESHOOTING  
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS>  
The ID for each machine is registered on the LGC board, the IMC board, the IMG board and  
the SYS board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a  
time.  
If more than one of the LGC board, the IMC board, the IMG board and the SYS board require  
replacement, replace them in the following procedure.  
1. First, replace one of the boards to be replaced.  
2.Turn the power ON and confirm that“READY”is displayed.  
3.Turn the power OFF.  
4.Replace another board that requires replacement.  
5. Repeat step 2. to 4.  
4.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code  
4.1.1 Paper transport jam inside the copier  
[E01] Paper leading edge not reaching the exit sensor  
[E02] Paper trailing edge not passing the exit sensor  
Is the fuser motor rotating?  
YES  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the exit sensor open-circuited?  
Is the connector of the paper exit sensor or the connector J123 on the LGC board  
disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the exit sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the paper exit sensor open-circuited?  
Is the fuser motor connector or the connector J122 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the fuser motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 1  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where was the paper stopped?  
Near the exit sensor (paper not damaged)  
Are the registration sensor and paper exit sensor functioning properly? (Does  
the actuator return normally?)  
YES  
1. In the test mode (03) check if each sensor is functioning.  
2. Reconnect each sensor connector.  
NO  
Repair the actuator if it has come off.  
Before reaching the fuser unit  
Did the paper stop, curling upward excessively?  
YES  
Replace the paper in the cassette.  
From the transfer belt surface to the exit sensor  
Do the size of paper and the size set match?  
NO  
Make the sizes match.  
YES  
Is the transfer belt moving?  
From drum C to drum K  
Is the black drum motor or the transfer belt motor stopped? Or is any abnormal  
noise heard from one of them due to loss of synchronism?  
YES  
1.Reduce the mechanical load by adjusting the drive system. Remove any foreign  
matter.  
2.Check the motor connector, and the connector J130 on the LGC board.  
3.Replace the motor.  
4. Replace the LGC board.  
No paper found  
Is the paper attached to the fuser belt?  
YES  
Remove the paper after the fuser unit cools down.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E03] Paper remaining inside the copier at power ON  
Is any paper remaining inside the copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Refer to [E01], [E02] and [E11] to [E26].  
[EB7] Restart time-out error  
Turn the power OFF and back ON.  
In case that this error occurs frequently, confirm the contents of the following items in the setting  
mode and report them.  
08-900 Firmware version (Basic section ROM)  
08-902 Engine ROM version (LGC)  
08-903 Printer ROM version (IMC)  
Condition at error occured (original size, paper size, copy mode, etc.)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 3  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.2 Paper feeding jam  
[E11] Paper misfeed from the ADU  
Is any paper remaining in the paper feed area inside the ADU?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J104 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU.  
[E12] Paper misfeed from the bypass  
Is any paper set in the bypass tray?  
YES  
Does the paper remain within the specified paper weight and stack height ?  
YES  
Is there any foreign matter such as scrap of paper in the paper  
transport path from the bypass feed section up to the registration  
rollers?  
YES  
Eliminate the foreign matter.  
NO  
Check if the bypass pick-up roller, bypass feed roller or separation  
roller is not deteriorated.Replace them if necessary.  
NO  
NO  
Keep to the paper weight and stack height described in the specification.  
Is the bypass paper sensor functioning properly? (Does the actuator return normally?)  
YES  
1. In the test mode (03) check if the bypass paper sensor is functioning.  
2. Reconnect the bypass paper sensor connector.  
NO  
Repair the actuator if it has come off.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E13] Paper misfeed from the 1st cassette  
[E14] Paper misfeed from the 2nd cassette  
[E15] Paper misfeed from the 3rd cassette  
[E16] Paper misfeed from the 4th cassette  
Open the side door;does any paper remain in the paper path from the cassette?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the width of the side guide set too narrow for the paper width?  
YES  
Set the side guide wider.  
(When the tray is being lifted, make sure that a gap is left between the paper and  
the side guide.)  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette feed-jam sensor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette feed-jam sensor connector or the connector J106 or J107 on the LGC board  
disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette feed-jam sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
[E19] Paper misfeed from the LCF  
Open the side door;does any paper remain in the paper path from the LCF?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette feed-jam sensor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette feed-jam sensor connector or the connector J105 or J107 on the LGC board  
disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette feed-jam sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 5  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.3 Paper transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor after feeding)  
[E21] Paper transport jam from the LCF  
[E22] Paper transport jam from the 1st cassette  
[E23] Paper transport jam from the 2nd cassette  
[E24] Paper transport jam from the 3rd cassette  
[E25] Paper transport jam from the 4th cassette  
[E26] Paper transport jam from the bypass feed unit  
Open the side door;does any paper remain in the paper path up to the registration roller?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette feed-jam sensor open-circuited?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the registration sensor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette feed-jam sensor connector, registration sensor connector, or the connector J107  
or J108 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette feed-jam sensor or the registration sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.4 Cover open jam  
[E41] Front cover opened during printing  
*To avoid electrical hazards, the following checks must be made after unplugging the power  
cord.  
Is the front cover or the paper-exit unit open?  
YES  
Close the front cover or the paper-exit unit.  
NO  
Is the AC harness between the main switch, front cover switch, paper-exit unit switch and switch-  
ing power supply open-circuited?  
Is any of the faston terminals (front cover switch, paper-exit unit switch, main switch) and the  
connector J701 of the switching power supply disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the disconnected faston terminal or connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the front cover switch or the paper-exit unit switch.  
2. Replace the main switch.  
3. Replace the switching power supply.  
[E42] Side door opened during printing  
Is the side door open?  
YES  
Close the side door.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the side door open/close switch open-circuited?  
Is the side door open/close switch connector or the connector J107 on the LGC board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the side door open/close switch.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 7  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E43] ADU pulled out during printing  
Is the ADU pushed in securely to the copier?  
NO  
Push in the ADU securely to the copier.  
YES  
Is connector J104 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU.  
[E45] LCF jam access cover opened during printing  
Is the LCF jam access cover open?  
YES  
Close the LCF jam access cover.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit open-circuited?  
Is the relay connector of the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit or the connector  
J105 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the LCF unit.  
[E46] Bypass unit opened during printing  
Is the bypass unit open?  
YES  
Close the bypass unit.  
NO  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the bypass unit open/close switch open-circuited?  
Is the bypass unit open/close switch connector or the connector J108 on the LGC board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the bypass unit open/close switch.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 8  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.5 Paper jam in ADU and reversing area  
[E50] Paper not reaching the ADU  
[E51] Paper not restarting from the ADU stack  
[E54] ADU paper transport jam  
Is the ADU pushed in securely to the copier?  
NO  
Push in the ADU securely to the copier.  
YES  
Is the connector J104 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU.  
[E52] Paper not reaching the ADU path sensor  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU path sensor open-circuited?  
Is the ADU path sensor connector or the connector J123 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the ADU path sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 9  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.6 Original jam in the RADF  
[E71] Original not reaching the aligning sensor  
[E72] Original not reaching the exit sensor  
[E73] Original not passing the exit sensor  
[Two or more originals are fed simultaneously.]  
Have too many originals been placed?  
YES  
Reset the originals, following the specification.  
NO  
Are the original sheets curled or folded too much?  
YES  
Flatten and reset the originals.  
NO  
Are different-size originals placed together?  
YES  
Set only one-size originals.  
NO  
Is the gap between the aligning plate and the feed roller too large?  
YES  
Adjust the gap.  
NO  
Is the separation pad stained?  
YES  
Clean the separation pad.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 10  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[The original does not reach the aligning roller.]  
Is the pick-up roller or feed roller stained?  
YES  
Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the gap between the aligning plate and the feed roller too small?  
YES  
Adjust the gap.  
NO  
Is the transporting force of the pick-up roller or the feed roller insufficient?  
YES  
Replace the roller.  
[The original stops, skewed on the original glass.]  
Is the aligning roller stained?  
YES  
Clean the roller.  
NO  
Is the transport belt stained?  
YES  
Clean the belt.  
NO  
Is the RADF correctly installed?  
NO  
Properly install the RADF in parallel to the copier.  
Make sure that the skew and height are properly adjusted.  
[The side edges of the original are out of alignment with the side edges of the copy.]  
Is the slides set too wide in relation to the width of the original?  
YES  
Align the slides with the width of the original.  
NO  
Shift the original feeding tray back or forth to adjust.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 11  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.7 Paper jam in the finisher  
[E9F] Punching jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is either of the connectors J1 or J3 on the punch driver PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the punch driver PC board and punch home position sensor  
(PI3P) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.  
2. Replace the punch home position sensor.  
YES  
Replace the punch driver PC board.  
[EA1] Finisher paper transport delay jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor functioning properly? (Does the actuator return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2. Attach the actuator if it has come off.  
3. Replace the inlet sensor.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 12  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA2] Finisher paper transport stop jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors J17, J24, J9 and J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is any of the harnesses connecting between the finisher controller PC board and sensors (inlet  
sensor (PI1), buffer path inlet paper sensor (PI17), buffer path paper sensor (PI14), stapling tray  
sensor (PI4) and delivery sensor (PI3)) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the inlet sensor, buffer path inlet paper sensor, buffer path paper sensor, stapling tray sensor and  
delivery sensor functioning properly? (Do the actuators return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2. Attach the actuators if they have come off.  
3. Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[EA3] Paper remaining inside the finisher at power ON  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors J17, J24 and J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is any of the harnesses connecting between the finisher controller PC board and sensors (inlet  
sensor (PI1), buffer path inlet paper sensor (PI17), buffer path paper sensor (PI14) and delivery  
sensor (PI3)) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the inlet sensor, buffer path inlet paper sensor, buffer path paper sensor and delivery sensor  
functioning properly? (Do the actuators return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2. Attach the actuators if they have come off.  
3. Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 13  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA4] Finisher front door opened during printing  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the finisher connected with the copier?  
NO  
Connect the finisher with the copier.  
YES  
Is the connector J12 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (PI15) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the joint sensor working properly?  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely.  
2. Replace the joint sensor.  
YES  
Is the door of the finisher closed?  
NO  
Close the door.  
YES  
Is the connector J12 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and door opening sensor (PI16) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the door opening sensor working properly?  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the door opening sensor securely.  
2. Replace the door opening sensor.  
YES  
Is the connector J5 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and door switch (MS1) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the door switch working properly?  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the door switch securely.  
2. Replace the door switch.  
YES  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 14  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Is the connector J5 on the punch driver PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting between the punch driver PC board and front door switch (MS2P) open-  
circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the front door switch working properly?  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the front door switch securely.  
2. Replace the front door switch.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver PC board?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[EA5] Finisher stapling jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or copier, or on the stapling tray?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple sheet  
slided from the staple case?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor  
(PI22) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?  
NO  
Replace the stapler unit.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 15  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA6] Finisher early arrival jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the inlet sensor functioning properly? (Does the actuator return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.  
2. Attach the actuator if it has come off.  
3. Replace the inlet sensor.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[EA8] Saddle stitcher stapling jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or copier, or  
on the stapling tray?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the saddle stitcher and removing the  
staples stuck in the stapling unit?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position switch  
(rear:MS5S, front:MS7S) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?  
NO  
Replace the stapler unit.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 16  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EA9] Saddle stitcher door opened during printing  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?  
NO  
Close the door.  
YES  
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is any of the harnesses connecting between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover  
opening sensors (PI2S: front door opening/closing sensor, PI3S: delivery cover sensor, PI9S: inlet  
cover sensor) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the cover opening sensors working properly?  
NO  
1. Connect the connectors of the cover opening sensors securely.  
2. Replace the cover opening sensors.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[EAA] Paper remaining at the saddle stitcher at power ON  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors J10, J13 and J9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is any of the harnesses connecting between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and sensors  
(No.1 paper sensor (PI18S), No.2 paper sensor (PI19S), No.3 paper sensor (PI20S), vertical path  
paper sensor (PI17S) and delivery sensor (PI11S)) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor and  
delivery sensor functioning properly? (Do the actuators return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2. Attach the actuators if they have come off.  
3. Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 17  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EAB] Saddle stitcher transport stop jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is either of the connectors J10 or J9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is any of the harnesses connecting between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and sensors  
(No.1 paper sensor (PI18S), No.2 paper sensor (PI19S), No.3 paper sensor (PI20S) and delivery  
sensor (PI11S)) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor and delivery sensor functioning  
properly? (Do the actuators return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.  
2. Attach the actuators if they have come off.  
3. Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[EAC] Saddle stitcher transport delay jam  
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or copier?  
YES  
Remove the paper.  
NO  
Is any of the connectors J6, J9 and J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?  
Is any of the harnesses connecting between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and the sensors  
(No.1 paper sensor (PI18S), No.2 paper sensor (PI19S), No.3 paper sensor (PI20S), delivery sensor  
(PI11S), and paper positioning plate paper sensor (PI8S)) open-circuited?  
YES  
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, delivery sensor, and paper  
positioning plate paper sensor functioning properly? (Do the actuators return normally?)  
NO  
1. Connect the connector of the sensor securely.  
2. Attach the actuator if it has come off.  
3. Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Replace the saddle controller controller PC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 18  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[EAE] Finisher receiving time time-out jam  
Is the finisher working?  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
NO  
1. Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.  
2. Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.  
3. Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the copier side is  
open-circuited.  
4. Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller  
PC board is open-circuited.  
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 19  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.8 Special sheet jam  
[EC2] OHP film used except from bypass tray and 2nd cassette  
Use the 2nd cassette or the bypass tray as the feeding source of OHP film.  
[EC3] OHP film used in non-OHP mode  
Set the specified type of paper as selected on the control panel in the paper source.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 20  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.9 Drive system related service call  
[C05] ADU motor rotation abnormal  
Is the ADU motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector is  
open-circuited.  
2. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the ADU drawer  
connector is open-circuited.  
3. Check if any of the connectors J101, J102 and J104 on the LGC board is  
disconnected.  
4. Reduce the mechanical load on the motor by adjusting the drive system.Remove  
foreign matter if any.  
YES  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
Are the pins B2 and B4 of the connector J104 on the LGC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector J104 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
2. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
3. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
4. Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
[C06] Paper feed motor rotation abnormal  
Is the paper feed motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector J41 of the paper feed motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J109 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J703 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the paper feed motor is  
open-circuited.  
5. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the paper feed  
motor is open-circuited.  
6. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
7. Rotate the motor manually, clockwise as seen from its back, and if the motor  
load is abnormal, remove any foreign matter from the drive unit.  
8. Replace the paper feed motor.  
9. Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 21  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Are the pins A6 and A10 of the connector J109 on the LGC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector J41 of the paper feed motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J109 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
6. Replace the paper feed motor.  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the paper feed motor.  
[C0A] Developer motor rotation abnormal  
Is the developer motor rotating properly?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector J41 or J43 of the developer motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J109 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J703 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the developer motor is open-  
circuited.  
5. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the developer  
motor is open-circuited.  
6. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
7. Rotate the motor manually, counterclockwise as seen from its back, and if the  
motor load is abnormal, remove any foreign matter from the drive unit.  
(Do not try to rotate the motor clockwise as seen from its back.)  
8. Replace the developer motor.  
9. Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
Are the pins B12 and B16 of the connector J109 on the LGC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check if the connector J41 of the developer motor is disconnected.  
2. Check if the connector J109 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
5. Replace the LGC board.  
YES  
6. Replace the developer motor.  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the developer motor.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 22  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.10 Paper feeding system related service call  
[C11] ADU paper side guide operation abnormal  
Is the ADU pushed in securely to the copier?  
NO  
Push in the ADU securely to the copier.  
YES  
Has the timing belt for driving the paper side guide come off?  
YES  
Put the belt on properly.  
NO  
Is the connector J104 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU.  
[C12] ADU paper end guide operation abnormal  
Is the ADU pushed in securely to the copier?  
NO  
Push in the ADU securely to the copier.  
YES  
Has the timing belt for driving the paper end guide come off?  
YES  
Put the belt on properly.  
NO  
Is the connector J104 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the ADU drawer connector open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the LGC board.  
2. Replace the ADU.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 23  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C13] 1st cassette tray operation abnormal  
[C14] 2nd cassette tray operation abnormal  
[C15] 3rd cassette tray operation abnormal  
[C16] 4th cassette tray operation abnormal  
Is the cassette pushed in properly to the copier?  
NO  
Push in the cassette properly to the copier.  
YES  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette tray-up limit sensor open-circuited?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the cassette tray-up motor open-circuited?  
Is the cassette tray-up limit sensor connector, cassette tray-up motor connector, or connector  
J106 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
1. Reconnect the connector.  
2. Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is the gear of the cassette tray-up motor unit broken?  
YES  
Replace the gear.  
NO  
1. Replace the cassette tray-up motor.  
2. Replace the cassette tray-up limit sensor.  
3. Replace the paper feed unit.  
4. Replace the LGC board.  
[C18] LCF tray operation abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit open-circuited?  
Is the relay connector of the harness between the LGC board and the LCF unit or the connector  
J105 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
Are the switches and sensors in the LCF unit working properly?  
YES  
1. Replace the LCF tray motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
NO  
1. Replace the sensors and switches.  
2. Replace the LCF drive PC board or the LCF tray-down switch PC board.  
3. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 24  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.11 Scanner related service call  
[C27] Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a fixed time  
[C28] Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a fixed time  
Remove the original glass, move the carriages to the paper feed side, turn ON the power  
switch, and then proceed to check the following items.  
[C27] Are the carriages stuck at a point other than the home position?  
YES  
Check the SCM and SDV boards for any abnormal circuit.  
NO  
1. Check if any connector pin is disconnected, or any harness is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Check the scan motor drive pulley if its screws are loose.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the SDV board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Check if any conductor pattern on the SCM board is open- or short-circuited.  
5. Replace the SDV board.  
6. Replace the SCM board.  
[C28] Do the carriages, after arriving at its home position, make a big noise?  
YES  
Since the carriage home position sensor has not been turned ON,  
1. Check if the sensor connector is disconnected.  
2. Check the SDV and SCM boards for any abnormal circuit.  
NO  
Since the carriages do not move,  
1. Check if any connector pin is disconnected, or any harness is open- or short-circuited.  
2. Check if any conductor pattern on the SDV board is open- or short-circuited.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the SCM board is open- or short-circuited.  
4. Replace the SDV board.  
5. Replace the SCM board.  
[C29] Exposure lamp disconnection detected  
Does the exposure lamp light?  
YES  
1. Check the CCD and SCM boards for any disconnected connector.  
2. Check the shading correction plate of the original-width indicator unit if it is  
dusty.  
3. Check the CCD board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
4. Check the SCM board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
5. Replace the SCM board.  
NO  
6. Replace the lens unit.  
1. Check if the lamp connector is disconnected.  
2. Check the SCM board if any pin of connectors J7-1, -2 and -3 is disconnected or any harness  
is open- or short-circuited.  
3. Check the SCM board for any open- or short-circuited conductor pattern.  
4. Replace the SCM board.  
5. Replace the inverter.  
6. Replace the exposure lamp.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 25  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.12 Copy process related service call  
[C31] Used toner transport motor rotation abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the used toner transport motor open-circuited?  
Is the connector J123 or J102 on the LGC board, the relay connector or the used toner transport  
motor connector disconnected?  
YES  
Replace the harness.Reconnect the connector.  
NO  
Is used toner jammed? Is any abnormal mechanical load found?  
YES  
1. Remove the jammed used toner.  
2. Check for any foreign matter in the drive system.  
3. Check the bearing of the used toner transport auger for any abnormality.  
4. Check if the toner bag is covered with used toner.  
NO  
1. Replace the used toner transport motor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
* Since the used toner jamming can cause a serious damage to EPU, be sure to check that the  
EPU functions normally.  
[C33] Developer removal shutter function abnormal  
Reduce the mechanical load by adjusting the drive system. Remove any foreign matter.  
Is the connector J115 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.  
NO  
Replace the LGC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 26  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C35] Transfer belt unit contact/release function abnormal  
Reduce the mechanical load by adjusting the drive system. Remove any foreign matter.  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the transfer/transport unit drawer connector, or the  
harness inside the transfer/transport unit open-circuited?  
Is the transfer belt contact/release drive motor connector, LGC board connector J115 or J102,  
transfer belt home position switch connector, or transfer belt limit switch connector discon-  
nected?  
Is the transfer belt home position switch or the transfer belt limit switch defectively installed?  
YES  
1. Replace the harness.Reconnect the connector.  
2. Reinstall the transfer belt home position switch or the transfer belt limit switch  
securely.  
NO  
1. Replace the transfer belt home position switch and the transfer belt limit switch.  
2. Replace the transfer belt contact/release drive motor.  
3. Replace the LGC board.  
[C38] Auto-toner error (K)  
[C39] Auto-toner error (C)  
[C3A] Auto-toner error (M)  
[C3B] Auto-toner error (Y)  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the EPU drawer connector open-circuited?  
Is any harness inside the EPU or the auto-toner sensor harness open-circuited?  
Is the auto-toner sensor connector or the connector J120 on the LGC board disconnected?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the auto-toner sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 27  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C3C] Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (K)  
[C3D] Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (C)  
[C3E] Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (M)  
[C3F] Main charger wire cleaning abnormal (Y)  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the EPU drawer connector or any harness inside the  
EPU open-circuited?  
Is the wire cleaner drive motor connector, the connector J120 on the LGC board, the connector of  
the wire cleaner home position switch, or the connector of the wire cleaner limit switch discon-  
nected?  
Has the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch defectively installed or  
come off?  
YES  
1. Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
2. Reinstall the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch  
securely.  
NO  
Is the main charger securely installed?  
NO  
Reinstall the main charger.  
YES  
Is the mechanical load too heavy?  
YES  
1. Check if the cleaning pad is in normal contact with the main charger wire.  
2. Eliminate any foreign matter present in the drive system.  
3. Check if any movable component is abnormally worn.  
4. Clean the wire cleaner drive auger and remove stains or foreign matters.  
5. Clean the slidable surface of the charger case and remove stains or foreign  
matters.  
NO  
1. Replace the wire cleaner home position switch or the wire cleaner limit switch.  
2. Replace the wire cleaner drive motor.  
3. Replace the LGC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 28  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.13 Fuser unit related service call  
[C41] Thermistor or heater abnormal when warming-up is started  
[C42] Thermistor abnormal after the copier has become ready  
[C43] Thermistor abnormal during warming-up after abnormality judgment  
[C44] Heater abnormal during warming-up after abnormality judgment  
[C46] Heater abnormal (low temperature) after the copier has become ready  
[C47] Rear thermistor abnormal after the copier has become ready  
[C48] Heater abnormal (high temperature)  
*To avoid any hazards, be sure to unplug the power cable before proceeding to check the  
items in 1. and 2. below.  
*Be sure that the fuser unit is set in place securely.  
1.Checking the thermistors  
(1) Is any thermistor connector disconnected?  
(2) Are the thermistors (upper/lower, center/rear) in proper contact with the upper and lower  
heat rollers?  
(3) Are the harnesses for the thermistors (upper/lower, center/rear) open-circuited?  
2.Checking the heater lamps and SSRs  
(1) Check if the upper or lower heater lamp is open-circuited.  
(2) Check if the upper or lower heater lamp connector is disconnected.  
(3) Check if the thermostat is blown out.  
(4) Check if the upper heat roller or lower heat roller SSR connector is disconnected.  
(5) Check if the AC harness is open-circuited.  
(6) Check if SSR or the switching power supply is broken.  
3.Checking the LGC board  
(1) Check the LGC board if the connector J123 is disconnected.  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is open- or short-circuited.  
(3) Replace the LGC board.  
4.Clearing the status counter  
After completing the repair of what caused the error, proceed to do the following:  
(1) While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
(2) Enter [700] with digital keys, then press the [START] key.  
(3) Rewrite the status counter to "0", then press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] key.  
The status counter is dispalyed as follows:  
[C41]: "1" or "2"  
[C46]: "7"  
[C42]: "6"  
[C47]: "8"  
[C43]: "4"  
[C48]: "9"  
[C44]: "5"  
(4) Turn OFF the power and then back it ON again, and make sure that the copier gets ready  
normally.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 29  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C7] Error C7  
*To avoid any hazards, be sure to unplug the power cord before proceeding to check the items  
in 1. and 2. below.  
*Be sure that the fuser unit is set in place securely.  
1. Check if any thermistor connector is disconnected.  
2. Check if any harness of the thermistors (center/rear, upper/lower) is open-circuited.  
3. Check the LGC board if the connector J122 is disconnected.  
4. After completing the repair of what caused the [C7] problem, proceed to rewrite the status  
counter (08-700) to "0", following the same procedure as for [C41] to [C48] .  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 30  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.14 Communications related service call  
[C57] Communication error between LGC-CPU and IPC board  
(1) Check if any conductor pattern on the LGC board, mainly around IC23, IC72, IC74 and J125,  
is short- or open-circuited.  
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short- or open-circuited.  
(3) Replace the IPC board.  
(4) Replace the LGC board.  
[C5A] Communications error between LGC-CPU and printer controller  
<<For a built-in type printer controller>>  
1. Check if the printer controller unit is securely mounted on the copier.  
2. Check if the harness between the LGC and IMC boards is open-circuited, and if the connector  
J113 on the LGC board and the connector J182 on the IMC board are disconnected.  
3. Check if the harness between the switching power supply and the printer controller is open-  
circuited.  
4. Check if the connector J710 of the switching power supply is disconnected.  
5. Check if any conductor pattern on the IMC, IMG, MTH2 and LGC boards is open- or short-  
circuited .  
6. Replace the LGC board.  
7. Replace the IMG board.  
8. Replace the IMC board.  
9. Replace the MTH2 board.  
<<For an external type printer controller>>  
1. Check if the printer controller power is turned ON.  
2. Check if the harness between the PIF board and the printer controller is open-circuited.  
3. Check if the PIF board is firmly connected to the MTH2 board.  
4. Check if the harness between the LGC and IMC boards is open-circuited, and if the connector  
J113 on the LGC board and the connector J182 on the IMC board are disconnected.  
5. Check if any conductor pattern on the PIF, IMG, MTH2, IMC and LGC boards is open- or  
short-circuited.  
6. Replace the PIF board.  
7. Replace the LGC board.  
8. Replace the IMG board.  
9. Replace the IMC board.  
10. Replace the MTH2 board.  
[C5B] LGC-CPU signal transmission error to IMC-CPU  
[C5C] LGC-CPU signal reception error from IMC-CPU  
1. Check if the harness between the LGC and IMC boards is open-circuited, and if the  
connector J113 on the LGC board and the connector J182 on the IMC board are  
disconnected.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the IMC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 31  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.15 ADF related service call  
[C72] Aligning sensor automatic adjustment error  
1. Check if any foreign matter is present between the aligning sensor and the reflecting mirror,  
and if the reflecting mirror is stained.  
2. Check if the harness between the aligning sensor and the RADF PC board is open-circuited.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF PC board is open- or short-circuited mainly  
around IC1, IC14 and CN14.  
4. Replace the aligning sensor.  
5. Replace the RADF PC board.  
6. Initialize the RADF's EEPROM and perform the sensor automatic adjustment.  
[C73] EEPROM initializing error  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF PC board is open- or short-circuited mainly  
around IC7.  
2. Replace the RADF PC board.  
3. Initialize the RADF's EEPROM and perform the sensor automatic adjustment.  
[C74] Paper exit sensor automatic adjustment error  
1. Check if any foreign matter is present between the exit sensor and the reflecting mirror, and  
if the reflecting mirror is stained.  
2. Check if the harness between the exit sensor and the RADF PC board is open-circuited.  
3. Check if any conductor pattern on the RADF PC board is open- or short-circuited mainly  
around IC1, IC14 and CN8.  
4. Replace the exit sensor.  
5. Replace the RADF PC board.  
6. Initialize the RADF's EEPROM and perform the sensor automatic adjustment.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 32  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.16 Other service call (1)  
[C94] LGC-CPU abnormal  
Is "Call for service" displayed again even after the copier is turned OFF and then back ON?  
NO  
Observe the condition for a while.  
YES  
1. Check if the conductor pattern between LGC-CPU (IC32) and FROM (IC24) is open- or short-  
circuited.  
2. If this problem recurs frequently, replace the LGC board.  
[C9A] Main memory abnormal  
Is "Call for service" displayed again even after the copier is turned OFF and then back ON?  
NO  
Observe the condition for a while.  
YES  
1. Check if the conductor pattern between the LGC-CPU (IC32), FROM (IC24), SRAM (IC35)  
and BC-RAM (IC36) is open- or short-circuited.  
2. If this problem recurs frequently, replace the LGC board.  
[C9B] LGC-CPU protocol error  
[C9D] IMC-CPU protocol error  
Turn the power OFF, and back ON.  
In case that these errors occur frequently, confirm the contents of the following items in the  
setting mode and report them.  
08-267 C9B/C9D error history display  
08-900 Firmware version (Basic section ROM)  
08-902 Engine ROM version (LGC)  
08-903 Printer ROM version (IMC)  
[C9E] IMC board connection abnormal  
Is "Call for service" displayed again even after the copier is turned OFF and then back ON?  
NO  
Observe the condition for a while.  
YES  
1. Check if the IMC board, SYS board and the IMG board are firmly connected to the MTH1  
board.  
2. Check if the connector J181, J182, J185 or J188 on the IMC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if the connector J161 on the IMG board is disconnected.  
4. Check if the connector J1 on the SCM board is disconnected.  
5. Check if the harness connected to the IMC board is open- or short-circuited or if any  
connector pin is disconnected.  
6. Check if the harness between the SCM and IMG boards is open-circuited or if any connec-  
tor pin is disconnected.  
7. If this problem recurs frequently, replace the IMC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 33  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.17 Laser optical unit related service call  
[CA1] Polygonal motor rotation abnormal  
Is the polygonal motor rotating?  
NO  
1. Check if the polygonal motor connector is disconnected.  
2. Check if connector J181 or J188 on the IMC board is disconnected.  
3. Check if any harness is open-circuited or any connector pin is disconnected.  
4. Check if any conductor pattern on the IMC board is open- or short-circuited.  
5. Replace the IMC board.  
YES  
6. Replace the laser optical unit.  
Are both 10th and 12th pins of the connector J188 on the IMC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the IMC board is open- or short-circuited .  
2. Replace the IMC board.  
3. Replace the laser optical unit.  
YES  
1. Check if any conductor pattern on the IMC board is open- or short-circuited .  
2. Replace the IMC board.  
3. Replace the laser optical unit.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 34  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CA2] H-SYNC abnormal  
Is the polygonal motor rotating?  
NO  
Refer to "[CA1] Polygonal motor rotation abnormal".  
YES  
Are both 10th and 12th pins of the connector J188 on the IMC board always at the level "L"?  
NO  
Refer to "[CA1] Polygonal motor rotation abnormal".  
YES  
Is the harness between the RLY and IMC boards open-circuited?  
Are the connector J185 on the IMC board or the connector J201 on the RLY board discon-  
nected?  
YES  
Replace the harness. Reconnect the connectors.  
NO  
1. Replace the IMC board.  
2. Replace the laser optical unit.  
[CD1] Laser calibration error (K)  
[CD2] Laser calibration error (C)  
[CD3] Laser calibration error (M)  
[CD4] Laser calibration error (Y)  
Replace the IMC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 35  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.18 Finisher related service call  
[CB1] Feed motor abnormal  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the second feed motor (M8) rotating in reverse at the specified timing?  
NO  
Replace the second feed motor or the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is the shutter securely attached to the shutter upper/lower bars?  
NO  
Attach it securely.  
YES  
Turn the feed roller-2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and down?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism from the shutter upper/lower bars to the gears of the feed  
roller-2.  
YES  
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 36  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 2]  
Is the second feed motor (M8) rotating in reverse at the specified timing?  
NO  
Replace the second feed motor or the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is the shutter securely attached to the shutter upper/lower bars?  
NO  
Attach it securely.  
YES  
Turn the feed roller-2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and down?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism from the shutter upper/lower bars to the gears of the feed  
roller-2.  
YES  
Is the shutter open sensor (PI5) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[Procedure 3]  
Check the safety zone switch (MS3). Is the switch working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) correctly pressed?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) correctly pressed?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 37  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CB2] Delivery motor abnormal  
Rotate the delivery motor by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (PI10) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Does the voltage between J11-4 and -5 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V when the  
delivery motor starts rotating?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the delivery motor and finisher controller PC board correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Replace the motor.  
[CB3] Tray lift motor abnormal  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the tray home position sensor (PI8) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the tray elevation mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is 24V DC supplied to the tray lift motor (M5) from the finisher controller PC board when the tray is  
being driven?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the tray lift motor (M5) correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Replace the tray lift motor (M5).  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 38  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 2]  
Does the tray reach the tray upper limit detecting switch (MS5)?  
YES  
Lower the position of the tray.  
NO  
Is the tray upper limit detecting switch (MS5) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the tray upper limit detecting switch  
correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
[Procedure 3]  
Does the tray move up/down?  
NO  
Is the power supplied to the motor from the finisher controller PC board when the  
tray is moving?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is there any problem with the tray elevation mechanism?  
NO  
Replace the tray lift motor (M5).  
YES  
Correct the tray elevation mechanism.  
YES  
Are the tray lift motor clock sensor-1/-2 (PI9/PI19) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensors.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 39  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CB4] Alignment motor abnormal  
Is the alignment guide home position sensor (PI6) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the alignment motor (M3) correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any mechanical problem with the alignment guide movement path?  
YES  
Correct the mechanism.  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the alignment motor?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
[CB5] Staple motor abnormal  
Is the wiring between the stapler and the finisher controller PC board correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the stapler?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 40  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CB6] Stapler shift motor abnormal  
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI7) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M4) correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?  
YES  
Correct the mechanism.  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the stapler shift motor?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
[CB7] Height sensor abnormal  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the copier OFF and ON?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the height sensor (PS1) correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Readjust the height sensor. Replace the height sensor if it still causes the problem.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 41  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 2]  
Is the connector J6 on the finisher controller PC board, J114 of the height sensor (PS1) or relay  
connector J212 disconnected?  
YES  
Connect the connector.  
NO  
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and height sensor correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Replace the height sensor.  
[Procedure 3]  
Is the problem solved by readjusting the DIP switch?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and height sensor (PS1) correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Replace the height sensor.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 42  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CB8] Backup RAM data abnormal  
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the copier OFF and ON?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the finisher controller PC board?  
NO  
Replace the punch driver PC board.  
YES  
End  
[CB9] Saddle stitcher/paper pushing plate motor abnormal  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 43  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 2]  
Is the paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is there any problem with the paper pushing plate drive mechanism?  
YES  
Correct the mechanism.  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
[Procedure 3]  
Is the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is there any problem with the pushing plate drive mechanism?  
YES  
Correct the mechanism.  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 44  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CBA] Saddle stitcher/stitcher motor (front) abnormal  
[CBB] Saddle stitcher/stitcher motor (rear) abnormal  
Are the front or rear stitcher and its stand installed properly?  
NO  
Install them properly.  
YES  
Is the stitcher home position switch on the front or rear stitcher (MS7S/MS5S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the front or rear stitcher.  
YES  
Is the front or rear stitcher operating at the specified timing?  
NO  
Replace the front or rear stitcher.  
YES  
Check the wiring between the stitcher and saddle stitcher controller PC board.If there is no problem,  
replace the controller PC board.  
[CBC] Saddle stitcher/alignment motor abnormal  
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the alignment motor (M5S) operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the alignment motor (M5S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 45  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CBD] Saddle stitcher/guide motor abnormal  
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the guide motor (M3S) operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the guide motor (M3S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
[CBE] Saddle stitcher/paper folding motor abnormal  
Is the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper folding home position sensor (PI21S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper folding motor (M2S) operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper folding motor (M2S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 46  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CBF] Saddle stitcher/paper positioning plate motor abnormal  
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the paper positioning plate operating at the specified timing?  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
NO  
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4S)?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
[CD5] Saddle stitcher/sensor connector connection error  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the connector of guide home position sensor (PI13S) connected to the connector on the saddle  
stitcher controller PC board?  
NO  
Connect the two connectors.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-7 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is J9-8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly connected to the ground?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 47  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 2]  
Is the connector of paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) connected to the connector  
on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?  
NO  
Connect the two connectors.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is J9-11 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board properly connected to the ground?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
[Procedure 3]  
Is the connector of paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) connected to the connector on  
the saddle stitcher controller PC board?  
NO  
Connect the two connectors.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is J9-14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board properly connected to the ground?  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
YES  
End  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 48  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CD6] Saddle stitcher/microswitch abnormal  
[Procedure 1]  
Is the switch actuator for the inlet door working properly?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the inlet cover switch (MS1S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the voltage of J10-8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board 5V when the inlet door is open?  
YES  
The inlet cover sensor (PI9S) is broken. Replace it.  
NO  
Is the voltage between J19-2 (+) and J19-1 (-) on the finisher controller PC board 24V?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Check and correct the wiring between J19 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle  
stitcher controller PC board.If there is no problem, replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 49  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 2]  
Is the switch actuator for the front door working properly?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the front cover switch (MS2S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the voltage of J11-12 on the saddle switcher controller PC board 5V when the front door is  
opened?  
YES  
The front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) is broken. Replace it.  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[Procedure 3]  
Is the switch actuator for the delivery door working properly?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the delivery cover switch (MS3S) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the voltage of J11-9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board 5V when the delivery door is  
opened?  
YES  
The delivery cover sensor (PI3S) is broken. Replace it.  
NO  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
[CD7] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher  
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the copier?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC board  
correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the voltage between J3-2 (+) and J3-1 (-) on the finisher controller PC board 24V DC?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 50  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CD9] Swing motor abnormal  
[Procedure 1]  
Rotate the swing motor in reverse by hand. Does the swing guide move up and down?  
NO  
Correct the swing mechanism.  
YES  
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the swing guide open sensor (PI18) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the swing motor (M7) rotating in reverse at the specified timing?  
NO  
Replace the motor.  
YES  
End  
[Procedure 2]  
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) correctly pressed?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the switch.  
YES  
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) correctly pressed?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 51  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Procedure 3]  
Is the swing motor clock sensor (PI20) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Does the voltage between J11-6 and -7 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V when the  
swing motor starts rotating?  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the swing motor and finisher controller PC board correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Replace the swing motor.  
[CDA] Horizontal registration motor abnormal  
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) and finisher controller  
PC board correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the horizontal registration motor (M2P)?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver PC board?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 52  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CDB] Punch motor abnormal  
Is the punch home position sensor (PI3P) working normally?  
NO  
Replace the sensor.  
YES  
Is the wiring between the punch home position sensor (PI3P) and finisher controller PC board correct?  
NO  
Correct the wiring.  
YES  
Is the punching mechanism normal?  
NO  
Correct the mechanism.  
YES  
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor (M1P) ?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver PC board?  
YES  
End  
NO  
Replace the finisher controller PC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 53  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.19 Image quality related service call  
(1) After checking [CE1], [CE2] and [CE4], and taking appropriate action, perform the forced performing  
of image quality control.  
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Enter [878] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
3. Turn OFF and then back ON the power, and check that the copier becomes ready normally.  
(2) After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.  
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Enter [415] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" ~ "16" to "0", and then press the [SET] or  
[INTERRUPT] key.  
4. Enter [416] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
5. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" ~ "16" to "0", and then press the [SET] or  
[INTERRUPT] key.  
6. Enter [417] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" ~ "16" to "0", and then press the [SET] or  
[INTERRUPT] key.  
8. Enter [418] with digital keys, and then press the [START] key.  
9. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" ~ "16" to "0", and then press the [SET] or  
[INTERRUPT] key.  
10. Turn OFF and then back ON the power, and check that the copier becomes ready normally.  
[CE1] Image quality sensor abnormal (OFF level)  
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector J113, J114, J115 or J119 on the  
LGC board, or the connector J182 on the IMC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between the  
LGC board and the IMC board, or the harness between the LGC board and the switching power  
supply open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.  
NO  
Is LED (D17) on the LGC board lit? Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?  
YES  
Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.  
NO  
1. Replace the image quality sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the IMC board.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 54  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CE2] Image quality sensor abnormal (no pattern level abnormal)  
1. Check that the transfer belt unit is fully raised.  
2. Check that the transfer/transport unit is securely inserted.  
3. Check for any abnormal stain, large flaw or break on the transfer belt surface.  
4. Check that the drum and transfer belt are operating. If abnormal, correct any mechanical  
problem.  
Is any of the connectors J113, J114, J115,J119 or J123 on the LGC board disconnected?  
Is the connector J182 on the IMC board disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the IMC board open-circuited?  
Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or stained?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open-circuited?  
Is the main high-voltage transformer connector disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the main high-voltage transformer open-circuited?  
Is the transfer transformer connector disconnected?  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the transfer transformer open-circuited?  
Is any of the high-voltage contact points of the transfer belt unit in faulty contact? Is any contact  
points stained?  
Is the harness of the main high-voltage transformer or the transfer transformer disconnected or  
open-circuited?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector.Replace the harness.Clean the connector or contact  
point. Correct the contact point.  
NO  
Is LED (D17) on the LGC board lit? Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?  
YES  
Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.  
NO  
1. Replace the image quality sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
3. Replace the IMC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 55  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CE4] Image quality control test pattern abnormal  
(1) Use "Image quality control abnormal detection counterY~K display/0 clearing (08-415~418)"  
to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color.  
(2) Check "Output value display of image quality sensor/Low-density pattern (05-819)" to confirm  
if the value is under 300 (low-density pattern abnormal) for each color.  
under 300  
Poor cleaning of the transfer belt  
Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, correct  
300 or above  
the transfer belt around its cleaning balde.  
To (8)  
(3) Check "Output value display of image quality sensor/High-density pattern (05-820)" to confirm  
if the value is 600 or above (high-density pattern abnormal) and identify the color which  
pattern is abnormal.  
(4) Set the values of "Image quality control 2(08-401)", "Image quality control 5(08-402)" and  
"Image quality control 4(08-411)" to "0" (disabled).  
(5) Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) and check the patch of the color  
identified in step (3) to see if the image is abnormal (image omitted, all blank, all solid, etc.).  
Normal  
Abnormal  
Correct the items related to the image.  
To (8)  
(6) Replace the image quality sensor.  
(7) Set the values of "Image quality control 2 (08-401)", "Image quality control 5 (08-402)" and  
"Image quality control 4 (08-411)" to "1" (enabled).  
(8) Perform "Forced performing of image quality control (05-878)" and make sure it is completed  
normally (Error [CE4] does not appear).  
(9) Clear all "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y~K display/0 clearing (08-  
415~418)".  
(10)If any of the specified parts has been replaced, perform "Automatic initialization of image  
quality control (05-879)" ( Chapter 2.3) and then perform "Automatic gamma adjustment  
(05-643)" ( Chapter 2.6.1).  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 56  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CE5] Temperature/humidity sensor upper-limit abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ?  
Is the connector J108 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sensor  
disconnected ?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1.Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
[CE6] Drum thermistorY abnormal  
[CE9] Drum thermistor K abnormal  
Is the harness between the LGC board and the drawer connector for EPU disconnected ?  
Is the harness inside of the EPU and the harness of the drum thermistorY or K disconnected ?  
Is the connector J120 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor Y or K  
disconnected ?  
YES  
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.  
NO  
1. Replace the drum thermistorY or K.  
2. Replace the LGC board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 57  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[CF1] Color registration control abnormal  
<Check of the status of color registration sensor error>  
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
2. Enter [461] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
3. The color registration control result is displayed in four values (Y(0), M(1), C(2), K(3)).  
4. Check the value forY(0) displayed in 3..  
When [CF1] has occured, a value from 1 to 15 is displayed (normal if 0 or 16 or above).  
1-14: Data error (color registration sensor is normal)  
15: Reading error of color registration test pattern  
<Disabling the color registration control>  
5. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
6. Enter [742] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
7. Set the color registration control setting to "1" (manual).  
8. Enter [743] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
9. Set the color registration control during the warming-up to "0" (disabled).  
10.Turn the power OFF.  
<Check by the forced performing of color registration control >  
11.While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
12.Enter [407] with digital keys and press the [START] key. ৎ (Forced performing of color  
registration control)  
* At this time, use a digital tester to monitor the test point TP91 (front color registration  
sensor output) andTP93 (rear color registration sensor output) on the LGC board.  
– If the outputs are normal –  
Before starting the forced performing of color registration control, a voltage of approximately  
0.7V DC is displayed.  
After starting it, the voltage changes to approximately 4.4V DC, and this may drop  
instantaneously down to 0.7V DC. (There may be no fluctuations in voltage, depending on the  
reaction speed of the digital tester.)  
When the forced performing of color registration control is finished, the voltage returns to  
approximately 0.7V DC.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 58  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voltage before forced performing of color registration control  
DC 0.7V  
DC 0V  
Normal  
Check if the harness between the LGC board and the color  
registration sensor or the harness between the LGC board and the  
IMC board is open- or short-circuited.  
Check if any of the connectors (J182 on the IMC board, J113 and  
J114 on the LGC board) or the color registration sensor connector  
is disconnected.  
If there is no abnormality, check the color registration sensor.  
DC 5V  
Check if the harness between the LGC board and the color  
registration sensor is open- or short-circuited. Check if any of the  
the connectors (J113 and J114 on the LGC board) or the color  
registration sensor connector is disconnected.  
DC 4.4V  
Check if the harness between the LGC board and the color  
registration sensor or the harness between the LGC board and the  
IMC board is open- or short-circuited.  
Check if any of the connectors (J182 on the IMC board, J113 and  
J114 on the LGC board) or the color registration sensor connector  
is disconnected.  
If there is no abnormality, check the color registration sensor.  
Voltage during forced performing of color registration control  
Normally DC 4.4V.  
Instantaneously  
may drop down to  
0.7V DC  
Check if there is any charge abnormality or exposure errors onto  
Normally DC 0.7V  
the photoconductive drum (errors in the laser optical unit). Follow  
the next check item 13. and after.  
Reading error of color registration test pattern.Follow the next check  
item 13. and after.  
Normally DC 4.4V  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 59  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Check by the grid pattern>  
13.While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
14.Enter "1" with digital key and press the [PRINTER/NETWORK] key.  
15.Check the output grid patterns of yellow, magenta, cyan and black if there is image density  
difference among the front/center/rear areas or abnormality in the overall image.  
* At this time, there is no problem even if theY, M, C and K grid patterns are out of alignment.  
– If there is difference in tonal balance between the front and rear areas –  
• Check the state of contact of the photoconductive drum and the transfer belt.  
• Check the quantity of developer (check whether developer material is properly sup-  
plied onto the surface of the developer sleeve).  
– If there is any streak of yellow, magenta, cyan or black streak in the secondary-scanning  
direction –  
• Check if there is any stain or dust on the main charger wire that corresponds to the  
color of the streak.  
– If there is any white streak in the secondary-scanning direction –  
• Check if there is any stain or dust on the slit glass of the laser optical unit.  
– If the entire page is solid in a specific color –  
• Abnormality of the main high-voltage transformer corresponding to that color or  
abnormalityof the laser optical unit.  
Of the four main high-voltage transformers, exchange the main high-voltage trans-  
former considered to be abnormal for other main high-voltage transformer considered  
to be normal, and then output the chart again.  
If the solid color over the entire page changes as the result of exchanging the main  
high-voltage transformer, that main high-voltage transformer is abnormal.  
If the solid color over the entire page does not change, check whether there is any  
disconnection of the harness between the LGC board and the main high-voltage  
transformer or whether the power supplys to the main charger (disconnection of high-  
voltage harness or contact defects). If there is no problem, check the laser optical  
unit.  
If the density is low on both front and rear sides and any of the above abnormalities are not found,  
make the following check.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 60  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Check by the gradation pattern>  
16.While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.  
17.Enter "4" with digital key and press the [PRINTER/NETWORK] key.  
18.Check the output gradation images for gamma adjustment if there is any abnormality in the  
gradation of yellow, magenta, cyan and black.  
– If there are any abnormalities –  
(1) Check if the photoconductive drum and transfer belt are operating. If not, correct any  
mechanical problems.  
(2) Check if the transfer belt unit is raised fully upward.  
(3) Check if the transfer/transport unit is inserted securely.  
(4) Check the surface of the transfer belt for any abnormal stain, large flaw or break.  
(5) Check if the connector of the transfer transformer is disconnected.  
(6) Check if any of the high-voltage harnesses of the main high-voltage transformer/  
transfer transformer is disconnected.  
(7) Check the harness between the LGC board and the transfer transformer if it is open-  
circuited.  
(8) Check the high-voltage contacts of the transfer belt unit if they are contacting properly  
or if they are not dirty.  
(9) Check if any of the high-voltage harnesses is disconnected.  
(10) Check if the connector J113, J114 or J119 on the LGC board is disconnected.  
(11) Check if the connector J181, J182, J185 or J188 on the IMC board is disconnected.  
(12) Check if the harness between the LGC board and the color registration sensor is  
open-circuited.  
(13) Check if the color registration sensor connector is disconnected.  
(14) Check if any of the main high-voltage transformer connectors is disconnected.  
(15) Check if any of the harnesses between the LGC board and the main high-voltage  
transformers is open-circuited.  
(16) Replace the transfer transformer.  
(17) Replace the main high-voltage transformer.  
19. Check the sensor detection area of the transfer belt for any damage, and if damaged, replace  
the transfer belt.  
20. Check the emitting/receiving area of the color registration sensor if it is not dirty.  
* Be sure to do the following after having made checks and corrections:  
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.  
2. Enter [742] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
3. Set the color registration control setting to "0" (automatic).  
4. Enter [743] with digital keys and press the [START] key.  
5. Set the color registration control during warming-up setting to "1" (enabled).  
6. Turn OFF the power.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 61  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.20 Other service call (2)  
[F07] Communications error between system-CPU and LGC-CPU  
1. Check if the SYC board is securely connected to the MTH1 board.  
2. Check if the IMC board is securely connected to the MTH1 board.  
3. Check if the IMC board connector J182 is disconnected.  
4. Check if the LGC board connector J113 is disconnected.  
5. Check if the harness between the IMC and LGC boards is open-circuited.  
6. Check the version of FROM on the SYS board.  
7. Check the version of MROM on the LGC board.  
8. Check the version of IMC-ROM on the IMC board.  
9. Replace the SYS board.  
10. Replace the IMC board.  
11. Replace the LGC board.  
[F10] HDD formatting error  
(1) Format the HDD.(Enter "2" into 08-690)  
(2) Check if the HDD is mounted.  
(3) Check if the specified HDD is mounted.  
(4) Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.  
(5) Check if the power supply connector is disconnected.  
(6) Check if the connector J144 on the SYS board is disconnected.  
(7) Replace the HDD.  
(8) Replace the SYS board.  
(9) Replace the harness.  
*When changing a HDD, do the following operations after replacing a new one.  
1. Formatting of the HDD  
<Procedure>  
(1) Turen ON the power while the digital keys [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.  
(2) Confirm that "Test Mode" is displayed on the control panel. Enter the code "690"  
and press the [START] key. The display changes to "System Mode".  
(3) Enter "2" and press the [SET] or [INTERRRUPT] key.  
(4) [WAIT] is displayed.  
(5) Turn OFF the power after the message [REBOOT THE MACHINE] is displayed.  
2. Downloading of the UI data  
(
Chapter. 5)  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 62  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[F09] [F11] [F12] Communications error between system-CPU and scanner-CPU  
1. Check if the IMG board connector J161 is disconnected.  
2. Check if the SCM board connector J1 is disconnected.  
3. Check if the harness between the IMG and SCM boards is open-circuited.  
4. Check if the IMG board is securely connected to the MTH1 board.  
5. Check if the SYS board is securely connected to the MTH1 board.  
6. Check the version of FROM on the SYS board.  
7. Check the version of FROM on the SCM board.  
8. Replace the SYS board.  
9. Replace the IMG board.  
10. Replace the SCM board.  
4.1.21 Image processing related service call  
[F51] Communications error between system-CPU and AI board during pre-scanning  
1. Check if the AI board is securely connected to the connector on the IMG board.  
2. Check if the IMG board is securely connected to the MTH1 board.  
3. Check if the SYS board is securely connected to the MTH1 board.  
4. Check if FROM is mounted on the IC8 on the AI board.  
5. Check if FROM is mounted in the proper direction on the AI board.  
6. Replace the AI board.  
7. Replace the IMG board.  
8. Replace the SYS board.  
9. Replace the MTH1 board.  
* Service call [F51] occurs only when copying with the original mode “AI” selected.The other  
original modes are operable.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 63  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Troubleshooting of Image  
(1) Color deviation  
<Symptoms>  
Original mode  
All modes  
Location  
Phenomena  
Color  
deviation  
A B C  
A B C  
Color blurred in outline of  
white text or illustration  
on a colored background  
Text mode  
Text/Photo mode colored background  
Photo mode  
Map mode  
Outline in black text on a White void  
A B C  
A B C  
Color blurred in outline of  
line or text  
Color  
deviation  
A B C  
A B C  
Cause  
Section  
Step  
Check Item  
Criteria  
Measures  
Main-Classification Sub-Classification Specific-Classification  
1
2
Output the built-in grid pattern on A3/LD.  
Check the grid pattern.  
Perform following procedures from 2 and after.  
Are the grid lines out of alignment?  
Color registration  
control  
Control error or  
poor optimization  
Forced performing of color registration control  
Paper transport  
system  
3
Paper transport Low speed  
speed in regist-  
Adjustment error Check the grid pattern.  
Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction out of alignment and Readjust registration motor speed. * See P. 4-68.  
parallel in order ofY-M-C-K from the exit side in the whole image?  
ration section  
Low speed  
Low speed  
High speed  
Registration roller  
aging change  
Registration roller Check the condition of registration  
life (worn out) rubber roller surface.  
Adjustment error Check the grid pattern  
Adjustment error Check the grid pattern.  
Readjust registration motor speed. * See P. 4-68.  
Does the roller surface lack in friction and is it slippery? Replace the registration roller.  
Readjust registration motor speed. * See P. 4-68.  
Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction out of alignment and By fine adjustment (a few steps at a time), slacken  
parallelinorderofY-M-C-Kfromtheexitsideinthelatterhalfoftheimage? paper slightly, not tighten it (to a straight line in side  
4
Paper transport High speed  
speed in fuser  
unit  
Feed paper with the front door open  
Is paper tightened?  
view) between the transfer belt and fuser unit.  
and check the paper transport between  
the transfer belt and fuser unit.  
No problem is in normal paper mode, but  
in the thick paper 3 mode, deviation  
occurs in (Y)MCK order, at the trailing  
edge of A3/LD sheet.  
Is paper tightened?  
Increase the value of 05-408 (correction of fuser  
motor rotation speed for the thick paper 3 mode), by  
finely adjusting a few steps at a time.  
Drum drive system  
5
Drum rotation  
Unstable  
Motor abnormal  
Control circuit  
abnormal  
Checkdrummotoroperationinthetestmode(03).  
Check drum motor operation in the test  
mode (03).  
Troubleshoot the drum drive system.  
Troubleshoot the drum drive system.  
Drum motor  
rotation speed  
Inadequate  
Adjustment error Re-check values set for drum motor  
rotation speed.  
Is the value significantly different from the default value Reset drum motor speed to 1787.  
1787? (The value shifts one step each in connection  
with transfer belt speed.)  
Drum coupling  
Loose coupling  
Damage  
Check the grid pattern.  
Tighten the screws.  
Replace the couplings.  
Deformation  
Deformation or  
damage  
Replace the couplings.  
Replace the belt (troubleshoot the transfer belt).  
Transfer belt system  
Laser optical unit  
6
7
Transfer belt  
Drive roller  
Check the grid pattern.  
Check the condition of transfer belt edge.  
Is the misalignment of the secondary-scanning direction varied?  
Is the belt edge damaged or folded?  
Slipping  
Stain  
Check the grid pattern.  
Check the condition of roller surface.  
Check the grid pattern.  
Is the misalignment of the primary-scanning direction varied?  
Is there any stain?  
Is the misalignment of the primary-scanning direction varied?  
Clean it.  
Large driving  
load  
Tilt adjustment  
mechanism  
Reflection mirror  
warp  
Used toner  
Cleaning blade Peeling  
Adjustment me-  
Over capacity  
Troubleshoot the used toner system.  
Replace the cleaning blade (troubleshoot the transfebelt).  
Replace the unit.  
Check the grid pattern.  
Check the grid pattern.  
Check the grid pattern.  
Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction out of  
alignment at front or rear?  
Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction warped? Replace the unit.  
chanism defect  
f
lens characte-  
Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction warped? Replace the unit.  
ristic defect  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 65  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 64  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Uneven pitch and jitter image  
<Symptoms>  
Feeding  
direction  
Original mode  
All modes  
Location  
Phenomenon  
Occurs cyclically at right Uneven pitch  
angles to paper feeding  
direction  
Cause  
Criteria  
Measures  
Section  
Step  
1
Check item  
Main-Classification Sub-Classification Specific-Classification  
Perform following procedures from 2 and after.  
Output the built-in halftone and grid  
patterns on A3/LD.  
Is there uneven pitch extending 2.5 mm to 3 mm within an area  
about 130 mm wide from the leading edge of the image?  
Readjust registration motor rotation speed. * See P. 4-68.  
Readjust registration motor rotation speed. * See P. 4-68.  
Paper transport  
syetem  
2
Paper transport Low speed  
speed in regist-  
Adjustment error Check the grid pattern.  
ration section  
Low speed  
Low speed  
High speed  
Registration roller  
aging change  
Registration roller Check the condition of registration  
life (worn out) rubber roller surface.  
Adjustment error Check the grid pattern.  
Adjustment error Check the grid pattern.  
Does the roller surface lack in friction and is it slippery? Replace the registration roller.  
Readjust registration motor rotation speed. * See P. 4-68.  
Is there uneven pitch extending approx. 2.9 mm within an area  
about 150 mm wide from the trailing edge of the image?  
Is paper tightened?  
By fine adjustment (a few steps at a time), slacken paper  
slightly, not tighten it (to a straight line in side view)  
between the transfer belt and fuser unit.  
3
Paper transport High speed  
speed in fuser  
unit  
Feed paper with the front door open  
and check the paper transport between  
the transfer belt and fuser unit.  
Check the halftone pattern.  
Are there uneven pitches approx. 94 mm in the whole image? Replace the drum.  
Drum drive system  
4
5
Drum  
Surface condition  
Is there any damage?  
Replace the drum.  
Damage  
Check the drum surface.  
Is there any attached foreign matter?  
Clean or replace the drum.  
Attached foreign Check the drum surface.  
matter  
Troubleshoot the drum drive system.  
Troubleshoot the drum drive system.  
Drum rotation  
Unstable  
Motor abnormal  
Control circuit  
abnormal  
Checkdrummotoroperationintestmode(03).  
Checkdrummotoroperationintestmode(03).  
Is the value significantly different from the default value Reset drum motor rotation speed to 1787.  
1787? (The value shifts one step each in connection  
Drum motor  
rotation speed  
Inadequate  
Adjustment error Re-check values set for drum motor  
rotaion speed.  
with transfer belt speed)  
Re-fasten the screws.  
Replace the couplings.  
Drum coupling Loose coupling  
Damage  
Check the halftone pattern.  
Replace the couplings.  
Deformation  
Are there uneven pitches approx. 2.5 mm in the whole image? Re-fasten the screws to fix the tension arm.  
Are there uneven pitches approx. 75 mm in the whole image? Replace the transfer belt (troubleshoot the transfer  
Transfer belt system  
6
7
Drive unit  
Transfer belt  
Timing belt  
Deformation or  
damage  
Tension looseness Check the halftone pattern.  
Check the halftone pattern.  
Is the belt edge damaged or folded?  
belt).  
Condition of transfer belt edge.  
Are there uneven pitches approx. 75 mm in the whole image? Clean it.  
Is there any stain?  
Are there uneven pitches approx. 75 mm in the whole image? Troubleshoot the used toner system.  
Replace the cleaning blade (troubleshoot the transfer belt).  
Are there uneven pitches approx. 0.3 mm in the whole image? Replace the unit.  
Drive roller  
Slipping  
Stain  
Check the halftone pattern.  
Check the condition of roller surface.  
Check the halftone pattern.  
Large driving  
load  
Polygonal mirror Surface inclined Deformation  
Used toner  
Cleaning blade Peeling  
Over capacity  
Laser optical unit  
8
Check the halftone pattern.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 67  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 66  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* Fine adjustment of registration roller paper transport speed  
The optimized value against jitter and color misalignment is not always obtained because fine error is  
generated in automatic adjustment.  
If uneven color is generated in the secondary-scanning direction of the image and further adjustment is  
necessary, perform the following procedure from 1. to 7..  
1. Start up with the test print mode (04).  
2. Select the A3/LD size paper.  
3. Enter the code [234] (select the halftone pattern).  
4. Select [M] on the control panel and press the [START] key. Since the halftone image is to be continu-  
ously printed out, press the [STOP] key when the first sheet starts being fed, to make only one print.  
5. Repeat procedures 3. and 4. above to print out the halftone image of cyan (C) and black (K).  
6. Judge the paper transport speed status by image.  
Uneven color of 2.5mm pitch in halftone image is generated.  
Uneven color is partially generated at 120mm with magenta, 195mm with cyan and 270mm with black  
from the trailing edge. ꢀ Paper transport speed is high.  
ꢀ Paper transport speed is low.  
7. Adjust "Fine adjustment of registration motor rotation speed (05-410)" by one step, assuming the speed  
status from the grid pattern image and the image criteria in procedure 6. above. After adjusting, repeat  
procedures 1.to 6.above. When the step value decreases, the paper transport speed becomes higher.  
When the step value increases, the paper transport speed becomes lower.  
The speed should not be too low or too high because either case has harmful effect. (The step value  
should be approx. within 2853 30.)  
Note: First perform the adjustments "Fine adjustment of drum motor/transfer belt motor and fuser motor (05-401  
to 402)", before proceeding to "Fine adjustment of registration motor rotation speed (05-410)".  
If the adjustment "Registration motor speed adjustment (05-406)" is performed, the values of "Fine  
adjustment of registration motor rotation speed (05-410)" and "Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation  
speed (05-404)" are changed. Therefore, perform the settings of 05-404 again.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 68  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance  
Check image density.  
Check gray balance.  
Check color reproduction.  
Cause/Section  
Density/Color reprodu-  
ction/Gray balance  
Printer section *1  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Perform the automatic gamma  
adjustment.  
Remarks  
Check the image density/color  
reproduction/gray balance.  
Check the printer output image.  
2
3
4
5
Output the test print pattern for  
See step 6 if  
each color (04-231) and check it. defect occurs.  
Adjust the color balance.  
Adjust the image density.  
Clean it.  
Parameter adjustment  
value *2  
Scanner  
Check the image processing  
parameters.  
Is the original glass or mirrors  
or lens dirty?  
Printer density  
abnormal *1  
Check the density of printer output Perform the forced performing  
image.  
image quality control (05-878).  
Output the test print pattern in  
each color (04-231) and check it.  
Perform troubleshooting proced-  
ures against the faded image.  
Perform troubleshooting proced-  
ures against the background fogging.  
Perform troubleshooting proced-  
ures against the blotch image.  
Perform troubleshooting proced-  
ures against the poor transfer.  
Printer output image  
abnormal *2  
6
Is there any faded image (low  
density)?  
Is there any fog in the back-  
ground?  
Is there any blotch image?  
Is there any poor transfer?  
Is there any poor cleaning of the Correct the transfer belt area.  
transfer belt?  
(Refer to Service Manual)  
(Check inside the copier.)  
*1 When adjusting printer section, perform "Forced performing of image quality control " and then "automatic  
gamma adjustment".  
*2 When adjusting parameters, perform "Automatic gamma adjustment".  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 69  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Background fogging  
Cause/Section  
Density reproduction  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Remarks  
Check the gradation reproduction. Perform the automatic gamma  
adjustment.  
Printer section  
2
Check the printer output image.  
Output the test print pattern for  
See step 5  
each color (04-231) and check it. if defects  
occur.  
Parameter adjustment  
value  
3
4
Check the image processing  
parameters.  
Adjust the image processing  
parameters.  
Check the value of offset amount  
of processing background.  
While checking the above encir-  
cled image, adjust the reproduction  
level by the offset amount adjustment  
of processing background.  
Clean it.  
Scanner  
5
6
Is the original glass or mirrors  
or lens dirty?  
Is the auto-toner sensor normal? Check the operation of auto-toner  
sensor and readjust.  
Auto-toner  
7
8
9
Is the toner supply operating constantly? Check the motor and circuits.  
Is the main charger output normal? Check the circuits. *  
Main charger output  
Developer bias  
Developer unit  
Is the developer bias proper?  
Check the circuits. *  
10 Is the contact between the drum Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap  
and developer material proper? and pole position.  
Developer material  
Drum cleaning blade  
Toner dusting  
11 Is the developer's life finished?  
12 Is it cleaned properly?  
13 Is toner accumulated on the seals Remove toner and clean.  
of the developer unit?  
Replace developer material.  
Check drum cleaning blade pressure.  
* If the main charger and developer bias outputs seem to be abnormal, exchange the main high-voltage transformer of  
the color likely to be abnormal for another transformer of another color likely to be normal, and then, output the chart  
again.  
If the same color remains abnormal, check if there is any disconnection of harness between the LGC board and the  
main high-voltage transformer, disconnection of high-voltage harness, the power supply abnormal, or stain on the  
main charger wire.  
If the color changes as the result of exchanging the main high-voltage transformer, this fogging trouble is caused by the  
main high-voltage transformer defect. Therefore, replace the main high-voltage transformer of the abnormal color with  
new one.  
After this checking, return the other main high-voltage transformer back to the original color position.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 70  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(5) Moire/lack of sharpness  
B
A
Moire  
Cause/Section  
Density reproduction  
Step  
1
Check items  
Check the gradation  
reproduction.  
Measures  
Perform the automatic gamma  
adjustment.  
Remarks  
Parameter adjustment  
value  
2
3
Check the image proces- Check the sharpness adjustment  
sing parameters. value.  
Adjust the image proces- While checking the above encir-  
sing parameters.  
cled images A and B, decrease  
moire by sharpness adjustment.  
Printer section  
4
Check the printer output  
image.  
Output the test print pattern (04- When defects occur,  
231) for each color and check it. perform the corres-  
ponding trouble-  
shooting procedures.  
Lack of sharpness  
Cause/Section  
Density reproduction  
Step  
1
Check items  
Check the gradation  
reproduction.  
Measures  
Perform the automatic gamma  
adjustment.  
Remarks  
Parameter adjustment  
value  
2
3
Check the image proces- Check the sharpness adjustment  
sing parameters. value.  
Adjust the image proces- While checking the above encir-  
sing parameters.  
cled image A, increase sharpness  
by sharpness adjustment.  
Printer section  
4
Check the printer output  
image.  
Output the test print pattern (04- When defects occur,  
231) for each color and check it. perform the corres-  
ponding trouble-  
shooting procedures.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 71  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6)Toner offset  
Black solid  
Approx.  
220mm  
Shadow image  
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 220 mm behind the high density image.)  
Cause/Section  
Density  
Step  
1
Check items  
Is the density too high?  
Measures  
Perform the automatic gamma  
adjustment.  
Remarks  
Fuser unit  
2
Is the pressure between the fuser Check the pressure removal parts  
roller and lower heat roller proper? and pressure mechanism.  
3
4
Is the thermostat in contact?  
Is there scratch on the fuser belt Replace the fuser belt or the  
Establish its contact.  
or lower heat roller surface?  
Is the fuser belt or lower heat  
roller life ended?  
Are the upper/lower heat rollers Check and correct the control  
temperature proper? circuit.  
lower heat roller.  
Replace the fuser belt or the  
lower heat roller.  
5
6
Paper  
7
8
9
Check the paper type and mode. Select proper paper type and mode.  
Is non-recommended paper used? Use recommended paper.  
Is the specified developer used? Use the specified developer and toner.  
Developer material  
Scanner  
10 Are mirrors or original glass  
or lens dirty?  
Clean them.  
Printer section  
11 Check the printer output image.  
Output the test print pattern (04- See steps  
231) and check it.  
12 and 13 if  
defect occurs.  
Printer density  
abnormal*  
12 Is the density of printer output  
image too high?  
Perform the image quality control Repeat 2-3  
forcibly (05-878). Output and times if  
check the test print pattern (04-231). necessary.  
Check the image quality control  
related codes.  
Image quality control  
13 Is the control activated?  
* When adjusting printer section, perform "image quality control forced performing" and then "automatic gamma  
adjustment".  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 72  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) Blurred image  
Cause/Section  
Scanner  
Drum  
Step  
1
2
Check items  
Is the scanner bedewed?  
Is the drum bedewed or dirty?  
Measures  
Clean it.  
Wipe the drum with dry cloth.  
* Be sure never use alcohol or other orga-  
nic solvents because they have bad effect  
on the drum.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 73  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(8) Poor fusing  
Cause/Section  
Heater lamp unlighted  
Step  
1
Check items  
Is poor contact at the terminal point? Correct it.  
Measures  
2
Is the heater lamp open-circuited?  
Replace it.  
Pressure between  
fuser roller and low-  
er heat roller improper  
Thermistor, LGC board  
3
Are the pressure springs working Check/adjust the pressure springs.  
properly?  
4
5
Is the temperature of upper/lower heat Check/correct the related circuit.  
rollers too low?  
Paper  
Is paper damp?  
Change paper.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 74  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(9) Blank copy  
Cause/Section  
High-voltage transformer  
(transfer roller/  
Step  
1
Check items  
Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output and correct the circuit, or  
defective? replace the transformer.  
Measures  
developer bias)  
Processing unit (EPU)/  
developer unit set position  
Developer drive system  
Developer material  
2
Is the processing unit (EPU) or the Check/correct the developer sleeve coupling  
developer unit installed securely? engaging. Check the EPU sliding mechanism.  
Do the developer sleeve and mixer rotate? Check/correct the developer drive system.  
Is developer material properly Remove foreign matter from developer  
3
4
transported?  
material, if any.  
Developer pole position  
Doctor blade position  
Drum  
5
6
7
Is there any magnetic brush phase error? Check the developer pole position.  
Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect?  
Is the drum rotating?  
Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve jig.  
Check that the drum shaft is inserted.  
Check the drum drive system.  
Harnesses for SCM,  
SYS, IMG, IMC and LGC  
boards  
8
Are the connectors securely connected? Re-connect the connectors securely.  
Is any harness between the boards Replace the harness.  
open-circuited?  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 75  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(10) Solid copy  
Cause/Section  
Exposure lamp  
Inverter  
Step  
1
Check items  
Does the exposure lamp light?  
Measures  
Check the contact of the inverter connector.  
If the inverter does not work, replace it.  
If the lamp does not work, replace it.  
Main charger  
2
3
4
Is the main charger securely installed? Reinstall it securely.  
Is the main charger wire open-circuited? Replace it.  
Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output and correct the circuit, or  
High-voltage transformer  
(Main charger)  
defective?  
replace the high-voltage transformer.  
Harnesses for SCM,  
SYS, IMG, IMC and LGC  
boards  
5
Are the connectors securely connected? Re-connect the connectors securely.  
Is any harness between the boards Replace the harness.  
open-circuited ?  
Scanner  
6
7
Is there foreign matter in the optical Remove it.  
path?  
Is the scanner or the drum bedewed? Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.  
Keep the power cord plugged so that the damp  
heater can work.  
Bedewing of scanner  
and drum  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 76  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(11)White banding (in feeding direction)  
Cause/Section  
Laser optical unit  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Is there foreign matter or dust on the Clean the slit glass.  
slit glass?  
Main charger grid  
Developer unit  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Is there foreign matter on the charger Remove foreign matter.  
grid?  
Is there foreign matter inside the Remove foreign matter.  
doctor blade?  
Is there foreign matter on the drum Remove foreign matter.  
seal?  
Is the drum seal of developer unit in Modify the position of drum seal or replace it.  
proper contact with the drum?  
Is there any abnormalities on the Replace the drum.  
drum surface?  
Drum  
Transport path  
Does the toner image touch foreign Remove foreign matter.  
matter after transfer, before entering  
the fuser unit?  
Discharge lamp  
Scanner  
8
9
Has any LED of discharge lamp gone Replace the discharge lamp.  
out?  
Is there foreign matter or dust in the Clean the lens and mirrors.  
optical path  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 77  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(12)White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)  
Cause/Section  
Main charger  
Step  
1
2
Check items  
Is there foreign matter on the charger? Remove foreign matter.  
Is terminal contact poor? Clean or adjust terminals.  
Measures  
Drum  
3
Is there any abnormalities on the Replace the drum.  
drum surface?  
Discharge lamp  
Developer unit  
4
5
Is the discharge lamp lighting Replace the discharge lamp or clean term-  
properly?  
inals.  
Is the developer sleeve rotating Check the developer drive system, or clean  
correctly? Is there any abnormalities the sleeve surface.  
on the sleeve surface?  
Drum and scanner  
drive systems  
High-voltage transformer  
(main charger and  
transfer roller)  
6
7
Is the drum or scanner jittery?  
Check each drive system.  
Is the high-voltage transformer output Check/correct any electric leakage and  
defective?  
related circuits.  
If the high-voltage transformer does not work,  
replace it.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 78  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(13) Skew (slantwise copying)  
Cause/Section  
Cassette  
LCF  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Is the cassette or LCF properly Reinstall the cassette or LCF properly.  
installed?  
2
Is too much paper loaded in the Reduce paper to 600 sheets or less.  
cassette or LCF?  
(1500 sheets or less for LCF)  
3
4
Is the paper corner folded?  
Are cassette or LCF side guides Adjust side guides.  
properly set?  
Change the paper direction and reinsert it.  
Paper feed roller  
Rollers  
5
6
7
8
9
Is the surface of paper feed roller Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or  
dirty?  
Is each roller improperly fixed to the Check and fasten E-rings, pins, clips and  
shaft? setscrews.  
Is the registration roller spring out of Mount the spring correctly. Clean the roller if it  
place? is dirty.  
replace the roller.  
Registration roller  
Pre-registration guide  
Original scale  
Is the pre-registration guide Correct it.  
improperly installed?  
Is the original scale slanted?  
Adjust it.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 79  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(14) Color banding (in feeding direction)  
Cause/Section  
Scanner  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Is there foreign matter in the optical Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.  
path?  
2
3
Is there dust or stain on the shading Clean the plate.  
correction plate?  
Is there foreign matter on the charger Remove foreign matter.  
grid?  
Main charger  
4
5
Is the charger grid dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger grid.  
Is there foreign matter on the main Remove foreign matter.  
charger?  
6
7
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire.  
Is there foreign matter inside the Remove foreign matter.  
charger case?  
8
9
Is the inner surface of charger case Clean inside.  
dirty?  
Is there paper dust on the cleaning Clean or replace the paper dust removal  
Cleaner  
blade edge?  
brush for the registration roller.  
Clean or replace the cleaning blade.  
10 Is the cleaning blade contact Correct it.  
improper?  
11 Is toner recovery defective?  
Clean the toner recovery auger section.  
Fuser unit  
12 a. Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser a. Clean or replace them.  
belt and lower heat roller surface?  
b. Is the thermistor dirty?  
b. Clean the thermistor.  
Drum  
13 Are there scratches on the drum Replace the drum.  
surface?  
Laser optical unit  
14 Is there foreign matter or dust on the Remove foreign matter or dust.  
slit glass?  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 80  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(15) Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)  
Cause/Section  
Main charger  
Fuser unit  
Step  
1
2
Check items  
Measures  
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire.  
Is the fuser belt, lower heat roller or Clean them.  
oil roller dirty?  
High-voltage transformer  
(main charger/  
transfer roller)  
Drum  
3
Is the high-voltage transformer output Check the circuit and replace the high-voltage  
defective?  
transformer if not working.  
4
5
6
Is there deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum, especially if the scratch  
surface? has reached the aluminum base.  
Are there fine scratches on the drum Check and correct the contact of cleaning  
surface (drum pitting)? blade and recovery blade.  
Is electrical continuity secured If not, replace the developer bias supply  
between the developer bias supply spring.  
spring and the recovery roller?  
Scattered toner recove-  
ry roller of developer  
unit  
Scanner carriage section  
7
Is there foreign matter on the carriage Remove foreign matter.  
rail?  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 81  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(16)White spots  
Cause/Section  
Developer unit/  
Toner cartridge  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Is the toner density of developer Check and correct the auto-toner sensor and  
material proper?  
toner supply operation.  
Check whether the amount of toner is sufficient  
in the toner cartridge.  
2
3
4
5
Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper?  
Adjust the gap.  
Main charger  
Is there foreign matter on the charger? Remove it.  
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire.  
Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output.  
defective?  
High-voltage transformer  
(main charger/ develo-  
per bias/transfer roller)  
Developer material  
6
Is the developer material life ended? Replace developer material.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 82  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(17) Poor transfer  
Cause/Section  
Transfer belt  
Step  
1
Check items  
Is the transfer belt dirty?  
Measures  
Clean it.  
2
Is the transfer belt in proper contact Correct it.  
with the drum ?  
3
4
5
6
Is there any deformation or abnormali- Replace the belt.  
ties on the transfer belt?  
Is paper in the cassette or LCF curled? Reinsert paper with reverse side up or  
change paper.  
Is paper in the cassette or LCF damp? Change paper.  
* Avoid storing paper in damp place.  
Is the registration roller mal- Clean the roller, re-mount the spring, or  
Paper  
Registration roller  
functioning?  
replace defective clutch-related parts.  
Readjust the roller speed.  
High-voltage transformer  
(transfer roller)  
7
Is the high-voltage transformer output Check the circuit and adjust the transformer  
defective? output.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 83  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(18) Uneven image density  
Cause/Section  
Main charger  
Transfer belt  
Step  
1
2
Check items  
Is the main charger dirty?  
Is the transfer belt dirty?  
Measures  
Clean it or replace the charger wire.  
Clean the belt.  
3
Is the transfer belt in proper contact Correct it.  
with the drum?  
4
5
Is there any abnormalities or defor- Replace the belt.  
mation on the belt?  
Is there foreign matter or dust on the Clean the slit glass.  
slit glass?  
Laser optical unit  
Discharge lamp  
6
7
Is the discharge lamp dirty?  
Clean it.  
Has any LED of discharge lamp gone Replace it.  
out?  
Developer unit  
8
9
Is the magnetic brush in proper Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.  
contact with the drum?  
Is the developer unit pressure Check the mechanism.  
mechanism malfunctioning?  
10 Is the transport of developer material Remove foreign matter if any.  
poor?  
Scanner section  
11 a. Is the platen cover open?  
a. Close the platen cover.  
b. Are original glass, mirrors, or lens b. Clean them.  
dirty?  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 84  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(19) Faded image (low density, poor color reproduction and poor gray balance)  
Cause/Section  
Toner empty  
Auto-toner circuit  
Step  
1
2
Check items  
Measures  
Is the “ADDTONER”symbol flashing? Replace the toner cartridge.  
Is there enough toner in the cartridge? Check the auto-toner circuit function.  
Is the toner density of developer  
3
material too low?  
Toner motor  
Toner cartridge  
4
5
Is the toner motor malfunctioning?  
Are there any abnormalities in the Replace the toner cartridge.  
toner cartridge?  
Check the motor drive circuit.  
Developer material  
Developer unit  
6
7
Is the developer material life ended? Replace developer material.  
Is the magnetic brush in proper Check the developer unit installation.  
contact with the drum?  
Check the doctor-sleeve gap and pole  
position.  
Main charger  
Drum  
8
9
Is the main charger dirty?  
Is there film forming on the drum Clean or replace the drum.  
surface?  
Clean it or replace the charger wire.  
High-voltage transformer 10 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the high-voltage transformer output.  
(developer bias) settings improper?  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 85  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(20) Image dislocation in feeding direction  
Cause/Section  
Adjustment error of  
scanner or printer section  
Registration roller  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Is same dislocation on every copy? Adjust the scanner/printer using the  
adjustment mode.  
Is the registration roller dirty, or the Clean the roller with alcohol.  
spring out of place?  
Is the registration motor mal- Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if they are not  
functioning? engaged properly.  
Is the paper feed motor mal- Check the circuit or the motor and replace  
functioning? them if necessary.  
2
3
4
5
Reinstall the spring.  
Paper feed motor  
Pre-registration guide  
Is the pre-registration guide Reinstall the guide.  
improperly installed?  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 86  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(21) Image jittering  
Cause/Section  
—
Step  
0
Check items  
Is the toner image on the drum If proper, perform step 1 to 3; otherwise per-  
proper? form step 4 and after.  
Is the registration roller rotating Check the registration roller section and its  
normally? springs.  
Is the transfer belt operating normally? Check the drive system and replace the  
transfer belt if necessary.  
Are the upper/lower heat rollers and Check the drive system.  
Measures  
Registration roller  
Transfer belt  
Fuser unit  
1
2
3
fuser roller rotation proper?  
Replace the fuser belt, upper/lower heat  
Is the fuser belt transportation proper? rollers and fuser roller if necessary.  
Is there large scratch on the drum? Replace the drum.  
Drum  
Carriage operation  
4
5
6
Is the slider sheet defective?  
Replace it.  
Are there any abnormalities on the Replace the feet.  
carriage feet?  
7
8
9
Is the tension of timing belt in- Adjust the tension.  
appropriate?  
Is the carriage drive system mal- Check the carriage drive system.  
functioning?  
Scanner  
Are any mirrors loosely installed?  
Install them properly.  
Drum drive system  
10 Is the drum drive system mal- Check the drum drive system.  
functioning? Clean or replace the belts, pulleys, bushings  
if they have dirt or scratches.  
Check the EPU.  
Processing unit (EPU) 11 Is the EPU load too high?  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 87  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(22) Poor cleaning  
Cause/Section  
Developer material  
Step  
1
Check items  
Is the specified developer material Use the specified developer material and  
used? toner.  
Measures  
Cleaning blade  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Is there paper dust on the cleaning Clean it.  
blade edge?  
Is the cleaning blade peeled?  
Replace the blade.  
Check and replace the drum.  
Clean toner recovery auger.  
Toner recovery auger  
Fuser unit  
Is toner recovery defective?  
Check the cleaning blade pressure.  
Is the cleaning roller or the oil roller Replace the defective rollers.  
damaged or their life ended?  
Is there any bubble-like defect on the Replace the fuser belt. Check and modify the  
fuser belt (220mm pitch on the copy)? heater control circuit.  
Are the fuser belt and the lower heat Replace them.  
roller life ended?  
Is the pressure between the fuser Check and adjust the pressure mechanism.  
roller and the lower heat roller  
proper?  
9
Is the temperature of upper/lower heat Check and correct the circuit.  
rollers proper?  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 88  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(23) Uneven light distribution  
Cause/Section  
Original glass  
Main charger wire  
Discharge lamp  
Scanner  
Step  
1
2
3
4
Check items  
Measures  
Is the original glass dirty?  
Is the main charger wire dirty?  
Is the discharge lamp dirty?  
Are the reflector, exposure lamp, Clean them.  
mirrors, lens, etc. dirty?  
Clean the glass.  
Clean or replace the wire.  
Clean it.  
Exposure lamp  
5
6
Is the exposure lamp tilted?  
Is the lamp discolored or degraded? Replace it.  
Adjust the installed position of the lamp.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
4 - 89  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(24) Blotched image  
Cause/Section  
Paper  
Step  
1
Check items  
Measures  
Does the paper mode correspond to Check the paper type and mode.  
the paper type?  
2
3
Is paper too dry?  
Is the transfer belt in proper contact Correct it.  
Change paper.  
Transfer belt  
with the drums?  
4
5
Are there any abnormalities on the Clean or replace the belt.  
belt?  
Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output. Replace the transformer, if  
High-voltage transformer  
(transfer roller)  
abnormal?  
necessary.  
FC-210/310 TROUBLESHOOTING  
4 - 90  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. UPDATINGTHE FIRMWARE  
<<Caution>>  
Only the minimum firmware required for updating by the PC is installed in the system control PC  
board (SYS board), printer control PC board (IMC board), logic PC board (LGC board) and scanner  
control PC board (SCM board) provided as service parts.  
When any of the above PC boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other  
firmware version to ensure the most suitable firmware is installed.  
* Never use an unsuitable combination of firmware since it can cause abnormalities.  
• The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.  
• The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.  
• Microsoft, Windows and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of US Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.  
• Copyright on the software of Windows 95/98 are held by US Microsoft Corporation.  
• Some of the screens used in this manual to describe operations are of Windows 95/98.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 1  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1 Installing Software for Firmware Update  
5.1.1 Outline  
The procedure to update the software of the SYS, IMC, LGC and SCM board using the PPP (Point-to-  
Point Protocol) and FTP (File Tranfer Protocol) is described in this section.  
*This procedure is described based on theWindows 95/98. Information and necessary files  
corresponding to other OSs are supplied by the other service information.  
5.1.2 Requirements  
The following environment is necessary to update the firmware.  
Copier  
LGC board  
SCM board  
IMC board  
Serial  
cable  
PC  
SYS board  
Software Requirements for PC  
– MicrosoftWindows95/98  
–Virtual modem  
– FTP Server / tools (ex.War FTP Daemon)  
Use a serial cable for the DTE-DTE connection to connect the PC and SYS board.  
(Update cannot be performed with the cable for the DCE-DCE connection)  
See below for the connection lines.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
CD  
Meaning  
Reception carrier detection  
Reception data  
I/O  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DTE-DTE connection  
1 CD  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
I
CD 1  
RXD 2  
TXD 3  
DTR 4  
GND 5  
DSR 6  
RTS 7  
CTS 8  
CI 9  
Transmission data  
Data terminal ready  
O
O
2 RXD  
3TXD  
GND Signal ground  
4 DTR  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
CI  
Data setting ready  
I
O
I
5 GND  
Transmission request  
Transmission enabled  
Called indication  
6 DSR  
7 RTS  
I
8 CTS  
9 CI  
RS232C DTE-DTE Cross Cable Lines (D-SUB 9pin)  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protocol specifications between the PC and SYS board  
BAUD RATE  
DATA BIT  
115200bps  
8 BITS  
NONE  
1 BIT  
PARITY  
STOP BIT  
FLOW CONTROL  
ECHO  
NONE  
OFF  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 3  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.3 Dial-up networking function  
The settings necessary for the PPP are described in this section. The dial-up networking function is  
used to perform the PPP connection on the Windows 95/98.  
(1) Virtual modem  
Since a modem is supposed to be used for theWindows 95/98 dial-up networking, download a virtual  
modem to enable the connection performed directly with a serial cable.  
(2) Installation of virtual modem  
Download the following file from the web.  
URL:http://www.kevin-wells.com/net/mdmcbx4.inf  
After the above file was downloaded, install the modem as follows.  
Click the “Modems” button on the Control Panel to display the following window, then click [Add].  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The ModemWizard is opened.  
Check "Don't detect my modem; I will select it from a list", and click [Next].  
Click [Have Disk], then select a folder in which the downloaded file has been stored.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 5  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select "Direct Connection", then click [Next].  
Select "Communications Port (COM1)", then click [Next].  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click the [Finish] button to complete the virtual modem installation.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 7  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.4 Installing dial-up networking  
Your computer might be already set up to use a network. If the Windows prompts you for a network  
password at the startup and if the Network Neighborhood icon appears on theWindows desktop, the  
network function is already set up. In this case, you can skip this section.  
In the "Network" dialog box, click the "Configuration" tab.  
Confirm that "Dial-Up Adapter" and "TCP/IP" are displayed.  
If your PC does not have "Dial-Up Adapter", click [Add].  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 8  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select "Microsoft" from the "Manufacturers" list and "Dial-Up Adapter" from the "Network Adapters" list,  
then click [OK].  
TCP/IP Protocol components are automatically installed together with "Dial-Up Adapter".  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 9  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.5 Setting dial-up networking  
Double-click "My Computer". If the "Dial-Up Networking" icon is not in the window, open [Add/Remove  
Programs] in the Control Panel to install it.  
Double-click "Dial-up Networking" and then "Make New Connection".  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 10  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter a name in the box "Type a name for the computer you are dialing", and then select "Direct Con-  
nection" for "Select a device".Then, click [Configure].  
Click the "General" tab in the "Direct Connection Properties" dialog box. Select "115200" for "Maximum  
speed", and check "Only connect at this speed".  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 11  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click the "Connection" tab, confirm that no item in "Call preferences" is selected, and then click [Ad-  
vanced].  
Confirm that no item in the "Advanced Connection Settings" dialog box is selected. Click the [OK]  
button to return to the "Make New Connection" dialog box and click [Next].  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 12  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter "#39" in the "Telephone number" box.  
Select an appropriate country code, then click [Next].  
Click [Finish] to complete the setting for the "Dial-up Networking".  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 13  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.1.6 Installing software for FTP server  
Install free software [War FTP Daemon Version 1.65] to use it as an FTP server.  
War FTP Daemon can be downloaded from the following website.  
FTP:ftp://ftp.jgaa.com/pub/products/Windows/WarFtpDaemon/1.6_Series/ward165.exe  
HTTP:http://download.jgaa.com/ftp/pub/products/Windows/WarFtpDaemon/1.6_Series/ward165.exe  
Some files are extracted by double-clicking the [ward165.exe] icon. Double-click [Setup.exe] to start  
installation.  
Create a new folder "C:\WEBSHARE\FTPROOT".  
Double-click [war-ftpd.exe] in the [war-ftpd] folder.  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 14  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select [Properties]-[Security]-[Edit User].  
Click [Add] and type in "dppc" in the "New name" box.  
Type in "dppc" in the "New Password" and "Verify Password" boxes, then click [OK].  
Select "dppc" and click the "File Access" tab. Then, click [Add].  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 15  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Double-click "Webshare".  
Double-click "Ftproot" and click [OK].  
Check the "Read", "Write", "Delete", "Execute", "List", "Create" and "Remove" boxes. Confirm that the  
check marks are not gray but black.  
Check "Root", "Home" and "Recursive" in the "Special" box as well.  
Click [Apply] and then [OK].  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 16  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enter the "ONLINE" mode by clicking the  
button before starting the firmware update.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 17  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2 Operation Procedure in [3][9] Mode  
5.2.1 Outline  
Connect the copier and PC with a serial cable and turn ON the power while pressing the digital keys [3]  
and [9] simultaneously to start the "Firmware Update Mode".The system firmware, UI data and engine  
firmware (printer ROM, engine ROM and scanner ROM) can be updated in this mode.  
Note: In the [3] [9] mode, the version of system firmware and UI data can be displayed, but the version of  
engine firmware cannot be displayed. Therefore, confirm the version of engine firmware in the setting  
mode (08).  
5.2.2 Preparation  
The following need to be prepared or performed in advance to update the firmware.  
(1) Software installation  
"Virtual modem" and "War FTP Daemon" have to be installed in the PC.  
Refer to "5.1 Installing Software for Firmware Update"  
"War FTP Daemon" has to be in the "ONLINE" mode when updating the firmware.  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 18  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) New file  
Prepare files for updating in the PC.  
New files with the preset directory and names are provided in the following folder.  
C:\WEBSHARE\FTPROOT  
New files:  
- System firmware  
sysfirm.tz  
uidataF.tz  
uidata0.tz  
uidata1.tz  
uidata2.tz  
uidata3.tz  
uidata4.tz  
uidata5.tz  
uidata6.tz  
uidata7.tz  
mfirm.tz  
- UI data fixed section  
- UI data common section  
- 1st language UI data  
- 2nd language UI data  
- 3rd language UI data  
- 4th language UI data  
- 5th language UI data  
- 6th language UI data  
- 7th language UI data (American English)  
- Engine firmware (Engine ROM)  
- Engine firmware (Printer ROM)  
- Engine firmware (Scanner ROM)  
imcfirm.tz  
scmfirm.tz  
(3) Connection between the SYS board and PC  
The SYS board and PC are connected with a cross cable.  
For the PC, connect the cable to the connnector corresponding to the serial communication port (eg.  
COM1) which is specified when the virtual modem is set up.  
For the SYS board, connect the cable to the MMF(FSMS) port.  
Note: Do not connect serial cable with machine power turned ON.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 19  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.3 Updating firmware  
Update the firmware in the [3][9] mode as follows:  
1. Turn ON the power of the copier while the digital keys [3] and [9] are pressed simultaneously.  
2. The following is displayed on the control panel of the copier.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
> Make a connection from PC.  
3. Make a serial connection using the dial-up networking function of the PC.  
Refer to "5.1 Installing Software for Firmware Update" for the dial-up network connection.  
Double-click the defined icon for connection in the "Dial-up Networking" dialog box to perform the  
connection processing.  
Enter "#39" in the "Phone number" box.  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 20  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. The following is displayed if the serial connection was completed successfully.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Established serial connection with PC.  
Number of the target area for  
updating  
> Press START key to install new  
firmwares.  
> Please select a target with DIGITAL  
keys.  
You can press [HELP] to confirm the current version (the version before the copier is updated).  
*The engine firmware version cannot be displayed in this screen. Use the setting mode to confirm  
them.  
08-902: Engine ROM version (LGC)  
08-903: Printer ROM version (IMC)  
08-904: Scanner ROM version (SCM)  
Press [HELP] again to return to the above screen.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Established serial connection with PC.  
target  
version code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
005.101  
004.001  
005.002  
006.001  
006.001  
006.003  
U
0
0
6
7
One of the following is  
displayed: U, E or X  
ৎ
11  
Press START key to next.  
[START] key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Established serial connection with PC.  
ৎ
target  
version code  
7
8
9
006.001  
006.001  
006.002  
006.001  
8
10  
13  
3
10  
Press START key to previous.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 21  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The "target" number indicates the following.  
1: System firmware  
2: UI data fixed section  
3: UI data common section  
4: 1st language UI data  
5: 2nd language UI data  
6: 3rd language UI data  
7: 4th language UI data  
8: 5th language UI data  
9: 6th language UI data  
10:7th language UI data  
The version number is displayed as "XXX.YYY".  
"XXX" indicates the major version and "YYY" is the minor version.  
The "code" indicates the following.  
A. The "code" for the System firmware ("target": 1) denotes the destination.  
U: USA and Canada  
E: European countries  
X: Australia and Asian countries  
B. The "code" for the UI data ("target": 2-10) denotes the language.  
Code  
2
Language  
Japanese  
Code  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Language  
Finnish  
3
American English  
English  
—
Norwegian  
Australian English  
Polish  
4
5
6
French  
Czech  
7
German  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Greek  
8
Romanian  
Bulgarian  
Portuguese  
Hungarian  
—
9
10  
11  
12  
Italian  
Spanish  
Danish  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 22  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Select the area to be updated using the digital keys and [INTERRUPT] key.  
(Press the [INTERRUPT] key to enter "#".)  
The selected number is displayed at upper right of the screen, next to "Target:".  
The relation between the selected number and area to be updated is as follows.  
1 : System firmware  
2 : UI data fixed section  
3 : UI data common section  
4 : 1st language UI data  
5 : 2nd language UI data  
6 : 3rd language UI data  
7 : 4th language UI data  
8 : 5th language UI data  
9 : 6th language UI data  
10 : 7th language UI data  
11 : Engine firmware (Engine ROM)  
12 : Engine firmware (Printer ROM)  
13 : Engine firmware (Scanner ROM)  
#1 : System firmware and all UI data (1 to 10)  
#2 : All UI data (2 to 10)  
#3 : All language UI data (4 to 10)  
#4 : All data (1 to 13)  
#5 : Engine firmware (Engine ROM and printer ROM) (11 and 12)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 23  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. The copier starts updating when the [START] key is pressed.  
Do not turn OFF the power of the copier or PC, or disconnect the cable after the [START] key  
has been pressed.  
Interruption during the file transmisson to the copier will destroy the file in the FROM of the  
copier. The data must be reinstalled after checking and performing the following items.  
• Connect the serial cable correctly.  
• Restart the copier and PC.  
• Change the "War FTP Daemon" to "ONLINE" mode.  
• Copy the new files to the PC again.  
In case of target 1 - 13 :  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Installing new firmware.  
— reading a file.  
Displays the status of updating  
process.  
– reading file.  
– erasing the device.  
– writing to the device.  
In case of target #1 - #5  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target:#1  
Installing a new firmware.  
— reading a file.  
Target Version  
l installing  
code  
Displays the area being processed.  
* During writing the data corresponding to the target 11 - 13, the transmission rate is displayed.  
- writing to the divice.  
xxxxx/XXXXX  
transmitted / total (byte)  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 24  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. The following will be displayed when the firmware update is completed successfully.  
In case of target 1 - 13:  
If you continue to update the other areas, press the [START] key and perform the step 5 and the  
followings for each area.  
Turn OFF the power or press the [CLEAR] key to exit the update screen.  
Version of the firmware  
installed  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Firmware version up completed.  
Version: 001.003 code:U  
Destination code of the  
firmware installed  
> Press START key to continue.  
In case of target #1 - #5:  
The following is displayed when the updating is finished.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: #1  
Firmware version up completed.  
Destination code of the  
firmware installed  
target  
version  
001.002  
002.001  
002.031  
003.022  
003.022  
003.033  
code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
0
0
2
3
6
Version of the firmware updated  
Press START key to next.  
8. Press the [CLEAR] key to cancel the updating process.  
However, it cannot be canceled once the data elimination process on the flash ROM is started.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Program canceled.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 25  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. The following error message is displayed when the firmware was not updated successfully.  
(If "- device erase error", "- device write error" or "- verify error" occurs, the "Recovery mode" is  
automatically activated when the power is turned ON next time. See 10.: Recovery mode)  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Error messages  
- file read error.  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
- file information error.  
- unfit device.  
– file read error.  
- device erase error.  
- device write error.  
- verify error.  
- cannot set NvRAM flags.  
- Communication error LGC  
- Communication error IMC  
- Communication error SCM  
10. Recovery mode  
The following is displayed when the power is turned OFF and then back ON after an error has  
occurred during the updating process.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Recovery mode : target 3–10 failed.  
> make a connection from PC  
The display changes as follows if the dial-up network connection (see procedure 3) was made  
successfully.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: #3  
Recovery mode : target 3–10 failed.  
> Press START key to install new firmwares.  
Further operations and displays are the same as those of the normal sequence.  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 26  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* If an error occurs while the processing of automatically sequenced writing of #4, do the following  
operations after completing the update in a recovery mode.  
Target Area of error  
#4 1~10  
Operation  
After completing the update to the target 10 in a recovery mode, update the  
target 11 to 13 in a writing processing with the area definition.  
After completing the update to the target 12 in a recovery mode, update the  
target 13 in a writing processing with the area definition.  
#4 11~12  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 27  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.4 Display  
The following screens are displayed in the mode [3][9].  
Power ON  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
> Make a connection from PC.  
Cannot connect with PC.  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
Connection  
failed  
Connection made  
successfully  
Number of area to be updated  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 6  
Target: 1  
Target: 1  
৏ৎ  
Established serial connection with PC.  
on with PC.  
on with PC.  
Press the  
digital key  
> Press START key to install new  
firmwares.  
Display changes  
corresponding to the  
keys to be pressed.  
Target: #1  
> Please select a target with DIGITAL keys.  
on with PC.  
2
Press the  
[CLEAR] key  
Press the  
Press the  
[CLEAR] key  
[START] key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Program canceled.  
1
1’  
2
Target: 1  
Power OFF  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 28  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of target 1 - 13 :  
1
Press the [START] key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Status of updating process (Target 1 - 10)  
– reading a file.  
Target: 1  
Installing a new firmware.  
– reading a file.  
– checking a read file.  
– checking the device.  
– setting NvRAM flags.  
– erasing the device.  
– writing to the device.  
– verifying the device.  
– clearing NvRAM flags.  
Status of updating process (Target 11 - 13)  
– reading a file.  
– writing to the device.  
Installation  
failed  
Press the  
[CLEAR] key  
Installed  
successfully  
2
3
Version of the firmware installed  
(Not displayed in case of Target 11 - 13)  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Destination code of the firmware installed  
(Not displayed in case of Target 11 - 13)  
Firmware version up completed.  
Version: 001.003 code: U  
2
> Press START key to continue.  
Press the  
[CLEAR]key  
Press the  
[START] key  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
> Press START key to install new firmwares.  
Target: 1  
Target: 6  
৏ৎ  
on with PC.  
on with PC.  
> Please select a target with DIGITAL keys.  
Press the  
digital key  
Display changes  
corresponding to  
the keys pressed  
Target: #1  
on with PC.  
Press the  
[START] key  
Press the  
[CLEAR] key  
1
1’  
2
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 29  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case target of #1- #5:  
1’  
Press the [START] key  
Status of updating process  
– reading a file.  
– checking a read file.  
– checking the device.  
– setting NvRAM flags.  
– erasing the device.  
– writing to the device.  
– verifying the device.  
– clearing NvRAM flags.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target:#1  
Installing a new firmware.  
– reading a file.  
Target  
l
version  
installing  
code  
Current area being  
updated.  
Press the  
[CLEAR] key  
Installation  
failed  
Installed  
successfully  
3’  
2’  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target: 1  
Firmware version up completed.  
Destination code of the  
firmware installed  
target  
version  
001.002  
002.001  
002.031  
003.022  
003.022  
003.033  
code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
0
0
2
3
7
Press the  
[CLEAR] key  
2’  
Press START key to next.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Program canceled.  
Version of the  
firmware installed  
Target: #1  
Target  
version  
001.002  
canceled  
code  
U
Power OFF  
1
2
Area whose  
updating  
process was  
canceled  
Power OFF  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 30  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of target of 1 - 13:  
3
Installation failed  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Error messages  
– file read error.  
Target: 1  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
– file read error.  
– file information error.  
– unfit device.  
– device erase error.  
– device write error.  
– verify error.  
– cannot set NvRAM flags.  
– Communication error LGC  
– Communication error IMC  
– Communication error SCM  
Power OFF  
In case of target #1 - #5:  
3’  
Failed  
Error messages  
– file read error.  
– file information error.  
– unfit device.  
– device erase error.  
– device write error.  
Firmware Version Up Mode  
Target:#1  
Failed to install a new firmware.  
– file read error.  
– verify error.  
– cannot set NvRAM flags.  
– Communication error LGC  
– Communication error IMC  
– Communication error SCM  
Target Version  
code  
U
1
2
001.002  
error  
Area where error  
has occurred  
Power OFF  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 31  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3 Updating the Firmware Using the Downloading Jig  
In this model, it is possible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the downloading jig using  
the dedicated connector and turning the power of the copier ON.  
The downloading jig consists of the programmed ROM and jig board. Two types of the jig board are  
available as follows.  
Firmware  
System firmware  
Engine firmware  
PC board  
Jig board to be used  
System control PC board (SYS board)  
Logic PC board (LGC board)  
K-PWA-DLS-320  
(engine ROM, scanner ROM and Scanner control PC board (SCM board) K-PWA-DLM-320  
printer ROM)  
Printer control PC board (IMC board)  
Use this socket when updating the firmware of engine  
ROM / LGC board. (Socket for ROM2 is not used.)  
Connector  
Socket for ROM1  
LED  
Socket for ROM2  
[Jig board (K-PWA-DLS-320)]  
Socket for ROM  
LED  
Connector  
[Jig board (K-PWA-DLM-320)]  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 32  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3.1 System firmware  
(1) ROM type  
There are two types of ROM to be downloaded.  
(a) ROM for application downloading  
The area in the FROM on the SYS board is updated. This ROM is used for the normal update.  
The data to be overwritten by this ROM are as follows.  
• System software basic section  
*This area cannot be downloaded using PC.  
• Program internal application  
• UI data fixed section  
• UI data common section  
• Language(UI) on the display panel  
(b) ROM for UI data downloading  
The language data in the HDD are updated.  
The data to be updated by this ROM are as follows.  
• UI data:The 1st to 7th languages  
When downloading is performed using the ROM for UI data downloading, only UI data in the HDD are  
updated.  
To make the result of updating effective, it is necessary to copy the updated data into the FROM by  
selecting a desired language in the setting mode “Selection of language(UI) on the display panel (08-  
220)".  
(2) Jig board  
Two types of the ROM mentioned above use the jig board K-PWA-DLS-320.  
(
Page.5-32)  
Note: Pay attention to the position and direction of the ROM when it is attached to the jig board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 33  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Procedure of downloading  
(a) Connect the jig and perform downloading  
Attach the ROMs on the jig board and connect the board with the connector of the copier.  
1. Take off the feed side upper and upper inner cover as well as the metal shield cover.  
(
Service Manual ch. 2.5.2)  
2. Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector on the SYS board (ROM attached side downward).  
Note: Turn OFF the power before connecting or disconnecting the jig.  
Jig connector  
Turn ON the power (downloading is automatically started).  
Note: Do not turn OFF the power during the downloading.  
The processing status is displayed on the control panel during the downloading.  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
- Completed  
- Installing  
-
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 34  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Update Completed!!” is displayed on the control panel when the downloading is completed.  
Turn OFF the power of the copier and disconnect the downloading jig.  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
- Completed  
- Completed  
- Completed  
Update Completed!!  
“Update Failed.” is displayed on the control panel when the downloading was not completed success-  
fully. Turn OFF the power, check the downloading jig and copier and attempt the downloading again.  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
- Completed  
- Failed  
-
Update Failed.  
Note: Check the following in case that the downloading was not performed successfully.  
• Check if the ROM is attached properly.  
• Check if the ROM data were written correctly.  
• Check if the downloading jig is connected properly.  
• Check if the HDD is connected properly. (for UI data downloading)  
When the UI data and the applications are updated at the same time, perform the downloading  
successively.  
When UI data downloading is performed, the UI data in the HDD are updated but the display UI at power  
ON in the FROM is not changed. To make the result of updating effective for the display UI at power  
ON, it is necessary to copy the updated data into the FROM by selecting a language in the setting  
mode (08-220).  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 35  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Confirmation of the downloaded data  
Check each data version when the downloading is completed to confirm that the downloading was  
performed correctly. Check the version in the setting mode (08). Confirm that the version numbers  
shown by entering the following codes match the specified version numbers.  
Confirmation for application downloading:  
08-900 : System firmware version  
08-920 : Basic section software version  
08-921 : Program internal (application) version  
08-922 : UI data fixed section version  
08-923 : UI data common section version  
08-930 :Version of language(UI) on the display at power ON in FROM  
Confirmation for UI data downloading:  
08-924 :Version of UI data 1st language in HDD  
08-925 :Version of UI data 2nd language in HDD  
08-926 :Version of UI data 3rd language in HDD  
08-927 :Version of UI data 4th language in HDD  
08-928 :Version of UI data 5th language in HDD  
08-929 :Version of UI data 6th language in HDD  
08-931 :Version of UI data 7th language in HDD  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 36  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Screens displayed during the download  
(a) Application downloading  
The screens change as follows during the application downloading.  
Power ON  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
-
-
-
[Check Devices] Status message  
Checking the device  
Device error  
: Checking  
: Failed  
Downloading started  
[Update FROM] Status message  
Erasing data in FROM  
Writing data into FROM  
Writing into FROM not succeeded : Failed  
[Data Check] Status message  
: Erasing  
: Installing  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
for Field Service  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Checking the check sum  
Verifying data  
Check error  
: Checking  
: Verifying  
: Failed  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
- Completed  
- Completed  
- Verifying  
Downloading failed  
Downloaded  
successfully  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
for Field Service  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Download Board -> FROM Update Start.  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
- Completed  
- Completed  
- Completed  
Check Devices  
Update FROM  
Data Check  
- Completed  
- Failed  
-
Update Completed!!  
Update Failed.  
Message to notify that the  
process has been finished.  
Process succeeded: Completed  
Process failed : Failed  
Power OFF  
Power OFF  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 37  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) UI data downloading  
The screens change as follows during the UI data downloading.  
Power ON  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> Hard Disk  
UI data Update Start.  
HDD Initialize  
Update HDD  
-
-
-
Data Check  
Downloading started  
[HDD Initialize] Status message  
Initializing HDD  
Initialization error  
: Initializing  
: Failed  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
[Update HDD] Status message  
Writing into HDD  
Writing failed  
: Installing  
: Failed  
Download Board -> Hard Disk  
UI data Update Start.  
[Data Check] Status message  
Verifying data  
Check error  
: Verifying  
: Failed  
HDD Initialize  
Update HDD  
- Completed  
- Completed  
- Verifying  
Data Check  
Downloaded  
successfully  
Downloading failed  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board Firmware Update Mode  
Download Board -> Hard Disk  
UI data Update Start.  
Download Board -> Hard Disk  
UI data Update Start.  
HDD Initialize  
Update HDD  
- Completed  
- Completed  
- Completed  
HDD Initialize  
Update HDD  
- Completed  
- Failed  
-
Data Check  
Data Check  
Update Completed!!  
Update Failed.  
Message to notify that the  
process has been finished.  
Process succeeded: Completed  
Power OFF  
Power OFF  
Process failed  
: Failed  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 38  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3.2 Engine firmware  
The procedure to update the engine firmware (engine ROM/LGC board, scanner ROM/SCM board and  
printer ROM/IMC board) is described in this section.  
(1) Jig board  
The engine ROM/LGC board uses K-PWA-DLS-320, the scanner ROM/SCM board and the printer  
ROM/IMC board use K-PWA-DLM-320 as a jig board to update the engine firmware.  
When updating the engine ROM/LGC board, use only the socket for ROM1 of K-PWA-DLS-320.  
(The socket for ROM2 is not used.) (  
Page. 5-32)  
Note: Pay attention to the position and direction of the ROM when it is attached to the jig board.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 39  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Downloading  
(a) Attach the ROM to the jig board and connect the board with the jig connector of the copier.  
<<Engine ROM/LGC board>>  
1.Take off the rear cover. (  
Service Manual ch. 2.5.1)  
2. Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector on the LGC board (ROM attached side leftward).  
LGC board  
Jig connector  
<<Scanner ROM/SCM board>>  
Note: Remember that the damp heater, lens cover, etc. are hot.  
1.Take off the right top cover and feed side upper cover. (  
Service Manual ch. 2.5.2)  
Then, remove 2 screws to take off the connector cover (plate cover).  
2. Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector on the SCM board (ROM attached side upward).  
Jig connector  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
5 - 40  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<<Printer ROM/IMC board>>  
1.Take off the feed side upper and upper inner cover as well as the metal shield cover.  
(
Service Manual ch. 2.5.2)  
2. Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector on the IMC board (ROM attached side upward).  
Jig connector  
(b) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously (downloading is automatically started).  
(c) Turn OFF the power when the LED on the jig board starts flashing. Remove the downloading jig.  
(d) Check the version of the ROM in the setting mode (08) (engine ROM: 08-902, scanner ROM: 08-904,  
printer ROM: 08-903).  
Notes: • It is assumed that the downloading was failed if the LED on the jig board does not start flashing even  
though 30 seconds have elapsed since the downloading was started. Check if the ROM is attached  
properly, if the ROM data were written correctly and if the downloading jig is connected properly.  
• After the downloading, clean the mirror-1, -2 and -3, the underside of shading correction plate and the  
original glass if any dust or oil stains on them.  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
5 - 41  
FC-210/310 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
6.1 Output Channel  
There are four output channels which are not linked with the door switches, as shown below.  
(1) 3.3V(M) — For MPU on the SYS board, the image processing circuit, etc.  
3.3VA : Pins 4 and 5, J707  
Output to: IMC board, SYS board, AI board (via the IMG board), IMG board  
3.3VB : Pin 1, J708  
Output to: SCM board  
(2) 5.1V(M) — For mechanical control circuits on the LGC board, IMC board, SCM board,etc.  
5.1VA : Pins 3, 4 and 5, J706  
Output to: LGC board  
5.1VB : Pins 6 and 7, J707  
Output to:IMC board, SYS board, RLY board (via the IMC board),  
AI board (via the IMG board), IMG board  
5.1VC : Pins 1, 2, 3 and 4, J710  
Output to:built-in printer controller (optional)  
5.1VD : Pins 3 and 4, J708  
Output to: SCM board  
(3) 12V(M) — Mainly for analog circuits and the HDD (e.g.image quality sensor, color registration sensor)  
12VA : Pin 10, J706  
Output to: LGC board, IMC board (via the LGC board),  
image quality sensor (via the LGC board),  
registration sensor (via the LGC board)  
12VB : Pin 7, J708  
Output to:SCM board, SDV board (via the SCM board), HDD  
12VC : Pins 9, 10, 11 and 12, J710  
Output to:built-in printer controller (optional)  
(4) 24V(M) — For RADF, the finisher, fans, etc.  
24VH : Pin 1, J706  
Output to: LGC board  
24VI :  
Pin 9, J708  
Output to: SCM board  
24VJ : Pins 1 and 3, J709  
Output to: finisher  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 1  
FC-210/310 POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There are two output channels which are linked with the door switches.  
(1) 5.1V(D) — For the laser diodes and the laser drivers  
5.1VA : Pin 7, J702  
Output to: LGC board  
5.1VB : Pin 3, J705  
Output to:IMC board, RLY board (via the IMC board), LDR board (via the IMC board)  
(2) 24V(D) — For the motors, clutches, solenoids, fans, etc.  
24VA~C :Pins 1, 2 and 3, J702  
Output to:LGC board, paper feed motor (via the LGC board),  
fuser motor (via the LGC board),  
main high-voltage transformer (via the LGC board),  
transfer transformer (via the LGC board)  
24VD : Pins 1, 2 and 3, J703  
Output to:developer motor  
24VE : Pins 6 and 7, J703  
Output to:paper feed motor  
24VF : Pins 1 and 2, J704  
Output to: SCM board  
24VG : Pin 1, J705  
Output to: IMC board, polygonal motor (via the IMC board), tilt motors (via the IMC board)  
24VK : Pins 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17 and 19, J711  
Output to: LGC board  
<Output connector>  
Not linked with the door switch:  
J706 for the LGC board  
J707 for the IMC board, SYS board, RLY board and IMG board  
J708 for the scanner and RADF  
J709 for the finisher  
J710 for the built-in printer controller (optional)  
Linked with the door switch:  
J702 for the LGC board  
J703 for the developer motor and the paper feed motor  
J704 for the scanner  
J705 for the IMC board, RLY board, LDR board and the polygonal motor  
J711 for the drum motors, the transfer belt motor and the LGC board  
FC-210/310 POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
6 - 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Fuse rating>  
F 1  
12A/125V  
12A/125V  
12A/125V  
4A/125V  
4A/125V  
5A/125V  
4A/125V  
5A/125V  
4A/125V  
12A/125V  
3A/125V  
3A/125V  
3A/125V  
Primary side  
F 2  
F 3  
Secondary side  
F 5  
F 6  
F 7  
F 8  
F 9  
F10  
ICP3  
ICP4  
ICP5  
ICP6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
6 - 3  
FC-210/310 POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J702  
F3/10A  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24VA  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
24VB  
24VC  
DGA  
DGB  
DGC  
5.1VA  
POWFAN  
F5/4A  
J703  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24VD DEV-MOT  
24VD DEV-MOT  
24VD DEV-MOT  
DGD DEV-MOT  
DGD DEV-MOT  
24VE FED-MOT  
24VE FED-MOT  
DGE FED-MOT  
DGE FED -MOT  
Exposure lamp  
load  
Fuser lamp  
load  
10 NC  
High  
harmonic  
reactor  
Front Left  
door door  
switch switch  
F6/4A  
J704  
24VF  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM  
Main  
switch  
2
3
4
24VF  
DGF  
DGF  
Breaker  
Live  
F1  
Reg  
J705  
1
2
3
4
5
24VG IMC,POL,TILT  
DGG IMC,POL,TILT  
5.1VB IMC,RLY,LDR  
5.1DGB IMC,RLY,LDR  
NC  
N.F  
N.F  
Neutral  
F7/5A  
J711  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24VK  
DGK  
24VK  
DGK  
24VK  
DGK  
24VK  
DGK  
24VK  
Switching power  
supply  
10 DGK  
11 24VK  
12 DGK  
13 24VK  
14 DGK  
15 24VK  
16 DGK  
17 24VK  
18 DGK  
19 24VK  
20 DGK  
NC  
High  
harmonic  
reactor  
F8/4A  
J706  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
24VH  
DGH  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
LGC  
5.1VA  
5.1VA  
5.1VA  
GNDA  
GNDA  
GNDA  
PWRD
F2  
ICP5/3A  
N.F  
10 12VA  
11 12DG  
J707  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
IMC,SYS,IMG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GNDA  
GNDA  
GNDB  
3.3VA  
3.3VA  
5.1VB  
5.1VB  
ICP4/3A  
ICP6/3A  
J708  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.3VB  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM  
SCM,HDD  
SCM,HDD  
SCM,RADF  
SCM,RADF  
Reg  
GNDB  
5.1VD  
5.1VD  
GNDB  
GNDB  
12VB  
12DGB  
24VI  
F9/5A  
10 DGI  
F10/4A  
J709  
FINISHER  
FINISHER  
FINISHER  
FINISHER  
1
2
3
4
24VJ  
DGJ  
24VJ  
DGJ  
J710  
Printer controller  
5.1VC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
ICP3/10A  
5.1VC  
5.1VC  
5.1VC  
GNDC  
GNDC  
GNDC  
GNDC  
12VC  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
Printer controller  
10 12VC  
11 12DGC  
12 12DGC  
FC-210/310 POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
6 - 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
FC-210/310 WIREHARNESSCONNECTIONDIAGRAMS  
7 - 1  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.1 AC Wire Harness  
J614-6  
J614-7  
100V  
WHITE  
J701-1  
J701-3  
MAIN-SW  
BLUE  
FRNCV-SW  
LEFCV-SW  
WHITE  
J614-5  
J614-1  
INLET  
WHITE  
WHITE  
WHITE  
N
L
F
E
WHITE  
BLACK  
WHITE  
WHITE  
1
2
3
4
Noise  
filter  
Breaker 15A  
J614-8  
BLACK  
BROWN  
J615-2  
GREEN  
BLUE  
A-2  
J616-2  
J321-5  
BLUE  
J311  
C
SSR-U  
D
A
115V or 127V  
Exit  
-side  
SSR-L  
Mirror  
B
DNP  
-HTR  
DNP  
-HTR  
Feed  
-side  
J601-12  
RED  
J603  
J601-1  
RED  
J602  
Lens  
DNP  
PS-ACC  
INLET  
WHITE  
N
L
WHITE  
BLACK  
DNP  
-HTR  
3
4
1
2
-HTR  
Noise  
filter  
Breaker 20A  
BLACK  
BROWN  
GREEN  
UP  
-LAMP  
LOW  
-LAMP  
Thermostat  
Fuse  
Thermostat  
Fuse  
J281  
J291  
A
A
A
200V series  
Upper  
thermostat  
Lower  
thermostat  
A
SCN  
TBU  
J261  
BLACK  
J601-24  
BLACK  
J321-2  
J311  
J601-13  
INLET  
WHITE  
N
L
WHITE  
BLACK  
1
2
3
4
A-1  
BROWN  
Noise  
filter  
Breaker 10A  
BROWN  
BLACK  
BROWN  
GREEN  
J615-1  
LEFCV-SW  
FRNCV-SW  
MAIN-SW  
J614-3  
SSR-D  
J701-6  
J701-4  
BLACK  
BLACK  
BLACK  
(FC-200(JPN) only)  
BROWN  
J614-4  
J614-2  
BLACK  
BLACK  
FC-210/310 WIREHARNESSCONNECTIONDIAGRAMS  
7 - 3  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
7 - 2  
FC-210/310 WIREHARNESSCONNECTIONDIAGRAMS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(OPTION)  
(OPTION for JPN)  
for FC-200  
J32  
1
2
+24VD  
FANL1  
CRG-FAN  
SCM-FAN  
J42  
1
2
J9  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
A10  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
B10  
+24V  
FANF1  
+24VD  
FANL1  
+24V  
FANF1  
GND  
APSR  
APS5V  
GND  
APSC  
APS5V  
APS3  
APS2  
APS1  
APS5V  
NC  
J35  
EXPO-LAMP  
1
2
3
J7  
1
2
CN1  
CN2  
GND  
APSR  
APS5V  
APS-R  
APS-C  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
+24V  
LMPON  
DG  
NC  
NC  
INV-EXPO  
3
J33  
1
2
GND  
APSC  
APS5V  
3
J34  
1
2
3
4
APS3  
APS2  
APS1  
APS5V  
GND  
GND  
NC  
NC  
FANL2  
+24VD  
APS-3BM  
CRG-FAN  
5
J31  
FANL2  
+24VD  
1
2
A4 series  
J32  
1
2
+24VD  
FANL1  
CRG-FAN  
SCM-FAN  
J42  
1
2
J9  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
A10  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
B10  
J273  
PWA-F-SDV  
PWA-F-CCD  
+24V  
FANF1  
+24VD  
FANL1  
+24V  
FANF1  
GND  
APSR  
APS5V  
GND  
APSC  
APS5V  
APS3  
NC  
APS1  
APS5V  
APS5V  
GND  
GND  
NC  
1
2
3
4
5
MOT-A  
MOT-B  
MOT-C  
MOT-D  
MOT-E  
SCN-MOT  
J35  
1
2
3
GND  
APSR  
APS5V  
APS-R  
APS-C  
APS-3  
J33  
1
2
ADU (OPTION)  
LCF (OPTION)  
GND  
APSC  
APS5V  
3
J38  
1
2
GND  
APS3  
APS5V  
3
J37  
1
2
FANL2  
+24VD  
GND  
APS1  
APS5V  
APS-1  
3
J4  
1
2
J466  
1
2
J466  
1
2
J708  
1
2
+3.3V  
+3.3V GND  
+3.3V  
GND  
J31  
FANL2  
+24VD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
VDD  
VDD  
GND  
GND  
+12V  
GND  
+24V  
DG  
VDD  
VDD  
GND  
GND  
CRG-FAN  
LT series  
J706  
1
2
J101  
1
2
+12V  
+24V  
DG  
+12V GND  
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
DG  
+24V  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
VDD  
VDD  
VDD  
GND  
GND  
GND  
ACOFF  
+12V  
AG  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
J704  
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
1
2
3
4
PWA-F-SCM  
+24V GND  
DG  
PS-ACC  
J702  
J102  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+24VD  
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
DG  
DG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+12V  
J61  
1
2
J61  
1
2
GND  
HDD  
+24V  
DG  
DOWNLOAD JIG  
+5VD(NC)  
POWFAN(NC)  
J127  
J711  
J129  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MMFTXD  
1
3
5
2
4
6
+24VD  
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
DG  
DG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
MMFRXD  
MMFRTS  
MMFDSR  
MMFDTR  
MMFCTS  
MMFCNT  
VDD  
JIG  
RADF (OPTION)  
GND  
JA  
J124  
+24V  
DG  
1
2
+24V  
DG  
1
2
POW-FAN  
J432  
1
2
3
4
J122  
1
2
3
4
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
COIN-B or KEY-CTR  
(OPTION)  
DG  
5
6
FSMCLK  
VDD  
5
6
FS-MOT  
7
8
9
GND  
FSMOON  
FSMDIR  
7
8
9
J125  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND  
VDD  
for  
FC-200  
10  
10  
11  
12  
3
4
5
FSMOSL  
NC  
NC  
IPCAD0  
IPCAD2  
IPCAD4  
IPCAD6  
IPCDT0  
IPCDT2  
IPCDT4  
IPCDT6  
GND  
IPCWR  
IPCCS  
VDD  
IPCSW  
GND  
6
7
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
J425  
PWA-F-MTH2  
PWA-F-MAC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC  
FDMDIR  
VDD  
J404  
J109  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
PS-HVT-TB  
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
DG  
+24VD  
1
2
3
4
5
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
FDMCLK  
VDD  
GND  
FED-MOT  
VDD  
FDMRDY  
FDMCLK  
FDMBK  
FDMON  
IPCAD1  
IPCAD3  
IPCAD5  
IPCAD7  
IPCDT1  
IPCDT3  
IPCDT5  
IPCDT7  
GND  
GND  
J165  
J406  
1
2
FDMON  
FDMDIR  
FDMBK  
FDMRDY  
INFAN  
+24V  
NC  
NC  
SWOFF  
+24V  
1
2
3
4
5
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
GND  
VDD  
A9  
INFAN  
+24V  
IN-FAN  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
PWA-F-IMG-314  
JA  
JB  
MAIN-SW  
IPCRD  
IPCRST  
VDD  
GND  
PFDCLT-R  
PFDCLT-F  
J405  
1
2
3
4
+24VD  
PFDCLR  
+24VD  
PFDCLF  
J410  
1
2
+24VD  
PFDCLR  
+24VD  
PFDCLF  
+24VD  
MNFDCL  
NC  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
MNFD-CLT  
FDPS-CLT  
DOWNLOAD JIG  
J409  
1
2
PWA-F-MTH1  
NC  
J404  
+24VD  
FDPSCL  
DVMDIR  
VDD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J404  
+24VD  
+24VD  
DG  
DG  
+24VD  
1
2
3
4
5
GND  
DEV-MOT  
DVMRDY  
DVMCLK  
DVMBK  
DVMON  
J141  
1
2
3
4
5
6
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
GND  
VDD  
PWA-F-LGC  
PWA-F-SYS  
J501  
J114  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+12V  
AG  
TNREF  
TNLVL1  
TNLVL2  
TNLEDON  
AG  
TNLVL-SEN  
J500  
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10  
11  
12  
RLEDMON  
RPOSON  
AG  
RPOSIN  
+12V  
POS-SEN(R)  
POS-SEN(F)  
PS-ACC  
DOWNLOAD JIG  
J499  
CN9  
J512 J512  
1
2
3
4
5
TCTCNT  
GND  
+24V  
NC  
TCTPLS  
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
FLEDMON  
FPOSON  
AG  
FPOSIN  
+12V  
CONTROL PANEL  
CN2  
1
2
3
4
+12V  
GND  
GND  
VDD  
PC  
HDD  
J182  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J113  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND  
GND  
PRCBSY  
PRCACK  
PRCERR  
GND  
PRCMD  
GND  
PRSBSY  
PRSACK  
PRSERR  
GND  
PRSTS  
GND  
PRCPOW  
PREPOW  
IMA0D2  
GND  
LGPWOK  
GND  
PSTRT  
RSTRDY  
ISVSYN  
+12V  
TNLEDON  
TNREF  
TNLVL1  
TNLVL2  
AG  
FPOSON  
RPOSON  
FLEDMON  
RLEDMON  
AG  
FPOSIN  
RPOSIN  
AG  
TCPLS  
TCTCNT  
GND  
IMCERR  
GND  
IMA0D1  
IMCACK  
GND  
IMCMD  
GND  
IMSREQ  
IMA0D0  
GND  
PRCBSY  
PRCACK  
PRCERR  
GND  
PRCMD  
GND  
PRSBSY  
PRSACK  
PRSERR  
GND  
PRSTS  
GND  
PRCPOW  
PREPOW  
IMA0D2  
GND  
LGPWOK  
GND  
PSTRT  
RSTRDY  
ISVSYN  
+12V  
TNLEDON  
TNREF  
TNLVL1  
TNLVL2  
AG  
FPOSON  
RPOSON  
FLEDMON  
RLEDMON  
AG  
FPOSIN  
RPOSIN  
AG  
TCPLS  
TCTCNT  
GND  
IMCERR  
GND  
IMA0D1  
IMCACK  
GND  
IMCMD  
GND  
IMSREQ  
IMA0D0  
GND  
IMSTS  
GND  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
43  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
J123  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
J360  
1
2
3
UHCTH+  
UHCTH-  
UHETH+  
UHETH-  
THCNT  
NC  
NC  
NC  
FSUCNT  
GND  
GND  
EXIT  
VDD  
EXTDOR  
GND  
GND  
ADUPAS  
VDD  
USTNM-  
USTNM+  
USTFUL  
GND  
VDD  
UHRON  
GND  
GND  
LHRON  
NC  
NC  
NC  
+24VD  
TLCVSL  
+24V  
EXFAN  
+24V  
PUFAN  
+24VD  
EXTGAT  
+24V  
OUTFAN  
NC  
EXIT-SEN  
J352  
J352  
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
J362  
1
2
EXTDOR  
GND  
EXDR-SW  
A9  
J354  
J354  
J490  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
1
2
3
3
2
1
GND  
ADUPAS  
VDD  
1
2
3
ADUPS-SEN  
USTN-MOT  
J355  
1
2
J355  
2
1
USTNM-  
USTNM+  
PWA-F-IMC  
J353  
J353  
J461  
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
USTFUL  
GND  
VDD  
USFUL-SEN  
+
-
SSR(U)  
SSR(L)  
-
+
J359  
2
1
+24VD  
TLCVSL  
TLCV-SOL  
EX-FAN  
J356  
1
2
+24V  
EXFAN  
J358  
1
2
DOWNLOAD JIG  
J322  
1
2
J322  
1
2
+24V  
PUFAN  
PU-FAN  
UHCTH+  
UHCTH-  
UHETH+  
UHETH-  
THCNT  
J351  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
+24VD  
EXTGAT  
EXGAT-SOL  
OUT-FAN  
J601  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
J601  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
IMSTS  
GND  
IMAIN  
J604  
J604  
IMAIN  
J407  
1
2
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND  
GND  
IMAID0  
IMAID1  
IMAOUT  
GND  
IMSACK  
IMCREQ  
PWDN  
IM5VSW  
GND  
IMSERR  
GND  
SYSCNT  
GND  
GND  
NC  
GND  
SYSTS  
GND  
SYSERR  
SYSACK  
SYSBSY  
GND  
SYCMD  
GND  
+24V  
OUTFAN  
UHCTH+  
UHCTH-  
UHETH+  
UHETH-  
THCNT  
FSUCNT  
GND  
UHCTH+  
UHCTH-  
UHETH+  
UHETH-  
THCNT  
IMAID0  
IMAID1  
IMAOUT  
GND  
IMSACK  
IMCREQ  
PWDN  
IM5VSW  
GND  
IMSERR  
GND  
SYSCNT  
GND  
GND  
NC  
GND  
SYSTS  
GND  
SYSERR  
SYSACK  
SYSBSY  
GND  
SYCMD  
GND  
UHEC-THM  
UHEE-THM  
NC  
NC  
NC  
GND  
FSUCNT  
GND  
PWA-F-RLY  
NC  
A9  
B9  
LHETH-  
LHETH+  
LHCTH-  
LHCTH+  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
GND  
J605  
J605  
LHETH-  
LHETH+  
LHCTH-  
LHCTH+  
GND  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GND  
LHCTH+  
LHCTH-  
LHETH+  
LHETH-  
THCNT  
GND  
LHCTH+  
LHCTH-  
LHETH+  
LHETH-  
THCNT  
LHEC-THM  
LHEE-THM  
GND  
2002.02  
SYCERR  
SYCACK  
SYCBSY  
GND  
SYCERR  
SYCACK  
SYCBSY  
GND  
PWA-F-LDR-M  
PWA-F-LDR-K  
PWA-F-LDR-C  
PWA-F-LDR-Y  
FC-210/310 SERVICE HANDBOOK  
7. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
7.2 DC Wire Harness  
FC-200/310  
7.  
7.2 DC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Appendix> SPECIFICATIONS · ACCESSORIES · OPTIONS · SUPPLIES  
1. Specifications  
• Copy process  
• Type  
Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)  
Console type  
• Original table  
• Acceptable originals  
Fixed table (the left rear corner used for Standard original placement)  
Type: Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects. However, the automatic docu-  
ment feeder only accepts sheets of paper (64~105 g/m2, or 17~28 lb.), excluding  
carbon paper, pasted sheets and stapled sheets.  
Size : A3/LD max.  
• Copy speed  
(Copies/min.)  
FC-210  
Bypass feeding  
Paper supply  
Cassette  
Size specification Size specification  
LCF  
Paper size  
A4, LT  
YES  
21(31)  
NO  
12(14)  
21(31)  
21(31)  
21(31)  
17(23)  
14(19)  
12(16)  
–
21(31)  
B5  
21(31)  
14(16)  
–
A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
21(31)  
17(24)  
–
17(19)  
17(19)  
–
14(16)  
14(16)  
–
A3, LD  
12(14)  
12(14)  
–
Full bleed (12" x 18")  
A6-R  
12(12)  
12(12)  
–
–
21(24)  
21(24)  
–
A4, LT  
10.3(10.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
9.3(9.3)  
8.5(8.5)  
7.9(7.9)  
–
10.3(10.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
9.3(9.3)  
8.5(8.5)  
7.9(7.9)  
7.7(7.7)  
10.3(10.3)  
2~6(2~6)  
2~6(2~6)  
3.3(3.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
9.3(9.3)  
8.5(8.5)  
7.9(7.9)  
7.7(7.7)  
10.3(10.3)  
2~6(2~6)  
2~6(2~6)  
–
10.3(10.3)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A3, LD  
Full bleed (12" x 18")  
A6-R  
–
ThickPaper 2(All size)  
ThickPaper 3(All size)  
OHP films (A4, LT)  
–
–
3.3(3.3)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
A - 1  
FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FC-310  
Bypass feeding  
Paper supply  
Cassette  
Size specification Size specification  
LCF  
Paper size  
YES  
24(24)  
NO  
A4, LT  
B5  
31(31)  
31(31)  
31(31)  
23(23)  
19(19)  
16(16)  
–
14(14)  
31(31)  
24(24)  
16(16)  
–
A5-R, ST-R  
24(24)  
24(24)  
–
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
19(19)  
19(19)  
–
16(16)  
16(16)  
–
A3, LD  
14(14)  
14(14)  
–
Full bleed (12" x 18")  
A6-R  
12(12)  
12(12)  
–
–
24(24)  
24(24)  
–
A4, LT  
10.3(10.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
9.3(9.3)  
8.5(8.5)  
7.9(7.9)  
–
10.3(10.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
9.3(9.3)  
8.5(8.5)  
7.9(7.9)  
7.7(7.7)  
10.3(10.3)  
2~6 (2~6)  
2~6 (2~6)  
3.3(3.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
10.3(10.3)  
9.3(9.3)  
8.5(8.5)  
7.9(7.9)  
7.7(7.7)  
10.3(10.3)  
2~6 (2~6)  
2~6 (2~6)  
–
10.3(10.3)  
B5, A5-R, ST-R  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R  
B4, LG  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A3, LD  
Full bleed (12" x 18")  
A6-R  
–
ThickPaper 2(All size)  
ThickPaper 3(All size)  
OHP films (A4, LT)  
–
–
3.3(3.3)  
*Thin paper:64~79 g/m2, or 17~20 lb.  
*Normal paper:80~105 g/m2, or 21~28 lb.  
*Thick paper 1:106~163 g/m2, or 29lbs.~60 lb.cover/90lb. index  
*Thick paper 2: 164g/m2 ~209 g/m2, or 91~110 lb. index  
*Thick paper 3: 210~256 g/m2, or 111~140 lb. index  
Values in parentheses ( ) are the copy speed in the black mode copying.  
*
“–”means “not available”.  
*
The copy speeds listed are available when originals are manually placed for single-side, multiple copying.  
*
*
When the document feeder is used, the copy speed of 21 sheets per minute (FC-210) or 31 sheets per  
minute (FC-310) is only available under the following conditions:  
• Original/Mode:  
Single-side originals of A4/LT size, not selecting auto color, APS,  
automatic density and advance image enhancement mode  
• Number of sheets set: 21 or over (FC-210) , 31 or over (FC- 310)  
• Paper feeding:  
2nd cassette  
Actual ratio  
• Reproduction ratio:  
Reverse side copying speed of the automatic duplexing unit  
(When specific paper size is selected)  
*
A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R: 21 sheets/min. (FC-210), 31 sheets/min. (FC-310)  
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R:  
B4, LG:  
17 sheets/min. (FC-210), 23 sheets/min. (FC-310)  
14 sheets/min. (FC-210), 19 sheets/min. (FC-310)  
12 sheets/min. (FC-210), 16 sheets/min. (FC-310)  
A3, LD:  
FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
A - 2  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System copy speed  
*
Values in square brackets [ ] are for FC-310.  
The copy speeds are applicable when 10 A4-  
sized originals are set in the automatic document  
feeder and are copied with any of the modes  
listed on the left. The first copy time is included.  
These values are attained in full color mode  
copying.  
Copy mode  
Single-sided originals  
Ꭹ
Copies/min.  
16 [18]  
19 [25]  
19 [27]  
8 [9]  
*
*
1 set  
3 sets  
5 sets  
1 set  
Single-sided copies  
Single-sided originals  
Ꭹ
3 sets  
5 sets  
1 set  
14 [17]  
16 [21]  
7 [7]  
*
Two-sided copies  
Two-sided originals  
Ꭹ
3 sets  
5 sets  
1 set  
12 [15]  
14 [18]  
11 [11]  
16 [19]  
18 [23]  
Two-sided copies  
Two-sided originals  
Ꭹ
3 sets  
5 sets  
Single-sided copies  
• Copy paper  
Size  
Cassette Duplex copy  
A3~A5R  
LCF  
Bypass copy  
A3~A5-R  
Remarks  
A4, LT  
In the bypass mode,  
either irregular sizes or  
arbitrary sizes can be set.  
LD~ST-R  
LD~ST-R  
Weight  
64~163g/m2 64~105g/m2 64~163g/m2 64~256g/m2  
17lb~60lb.cover 17~28 lb. 17lb~60lb.cover 17lb~140lb.index  
~90lb.index  
–
~90lb.index  
–
Special paper  
–
Recommended  
OHP films and  
sticker labels  
• First copy time................... Approx. 9.5 seconds (A4/LT, the first cassette, 100%)  
•Warming-up time................ Approx. 4 minutes  
• Multiple copying.................Up to 999 copies;entry by digital keys  
• Reproduction ratio..............Actual ratio:  
100 0.5%  
Zooming:  
• Resolution/Gradation ........ Read:  
Write:  
25~400% in increments of 1%  
600 dpi (10 bit)  
Corresponding to 600 dpi x 600 dpi  
(primary scanning only :256 division smoothing)  
• Excluded image width ....... Leading edge: 5.0 2.0 mm, Trailing edge: 2.5 2.0 mm  
Side edge: 2.0 2.0 mm  
• Paper feeding..................... Automatic feeding: Cassettes – 2 pieces standard (expandable up to 4 pieces  
by installing optional cassettes)  
LCF – Optional (Stack height 165 mm :equivalent to 1500  
sheets of 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)  
Bypass feeding:  
(Stack height 21 mm :equivalent to 130 sheets of 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
A - 3 FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Capacity for originals ...................... A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, ST-R: 50 sheets (64~90g/m2) (17~24 lb.)  
(Optional automatic document feeder)  
40 sheets (91~105g/m2) (25~28 lb.)  
B4, Folio, LG, Comp: 35 sheets (64~90g/m2) (17~24 lb.)  
25 sheets (91~105g/m2) (25~28 lb.)  
A3, LD: 25 sheets (64~90g/m2) (17~24 lb.)  
20 sheets (91~105g/m2)(25~28 lb.)  
• Stacking capacity of sheets  
Paper weight 64~105 g/m2, 17~28 lb.:  
30 sheets  
(Optional automatic duplexing unit)  
•Toner supplying....................... Automatic toner-density detection and supply  
Toner cartridge replacing method  
• Density control ....................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps  
• Weight .................................... Approx.187 kg/413lb.  
• Power requirements ................ AC 115V/16A, AC 220 – 240V/9A  
• Power consumption ................ 2.0 kW or less (115V series, 200V series)  
The automatic document feeder, automatic duplexing unit and LCF are supplied with electric  
*
power through the copier.  
• Power consumption and warm-up time at energy saving mode  
Mode  
Power Consumption Warm-up time  
Efficiency  
Approx.100W  
(Approx.135W)  
Approx.160W  
(Approx.195W)  
Approx.225W  
(Approx.260W)  
Approx.100W  
(Approx.135W)  
Approx.160W  
(Approx.195W)  
Approx.230W  
(Approx.265W)  
Approx. 2 min 30 sec. Approx.56%  
(Approx.48%)  
Level 1  
Level 2  
Energy saving mode  
Approx. 1 min 15 sec. Approx.29%  
(Approx.25%)  
115V series  
0
0%  
Normal standby  
(0%)  
Approx. 2 min 15 sec. Approx.57%  
(Approx.49%)  
Level 1  
Level 2  
Energy saving mode  
Normal standby  
Approx. 1 min 15 sec. Approx.30%  
(Approx.26%)  
200V series  
0
0%  
(0%)  
* Values in parentheses ( ) are when the copier is with full options: The automatic document feeder,  
automatic duplexing unit, large-capacity feeder, finisher, hole punch unit, cassette modules and AI board  
* Level 1: Energy saver mode with priority aim of energy saving  
Level 2: Energy saver mode with priority aim of returning to standby  
FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
A - 4  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Dimensions............................. See the figure below (W868 x D750 x H997mm)  
997 mm  
750 mm  
868 mm  
2. Accessories  
Setup instructions  
Operator’s manual  
Color copy guide  
PM sticker  
1 pc.  
1 pc. (not available for MJD)  
1 pc. (not available for MJD)  
1 pc. (for MJD)  
1 set. (for NAD and MJD)  
1 pc. (for MJD)  
4 pcs.  
Setup report  
CS card  
Drum  
Operator’s manual pocket  
Detachable code  
Copy receiving tray  
Preventive maintenance check list  
Toner bag symbol sticker  
Warrantee sheet  
DF level up kit  
1 pc.  
1 pc. (for ASD, AUD and MJD)  
1 pc.  
1 pc. (for MJD)  
1 pc. (for MJD)  
1 pc. (for NAD)  
1 pc.  
* Machine version  
NAD:  
MJD:  
AUD:  
ASD:  
North America  
Europe  
Australia  
Asia  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
A - 5  
FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Options  
Platen cover  
KA-2060PC  
Automatic document feeder (RADF)  
Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)  
Cassette module  
MR-3006A, MR-3006E  
MD-5007  
MY-1020  
Slot cover  
KE-FC22  
Large capacity feeder (LCF)  
Finisher  
MP-1503LT,MP1503A4  
MJ-1019, MJ-1020 (with saddle stitching function)  
Hole punch unit  
MJ-6002N,MJ-6002E,MJ-6002F,MJ-6002S  
Staple cartridge  
STAPLE-700  
STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitching)  
GA-1130  
External printer controller (Fiery Z5)  
Built-in printer controller (Fiery New X3e)  
Video I/F kit for external controller connection  
Control panel kit for built-in controller  
Key copy counter, Key copy counter socket  
Work table  
GA-1120  
KR-8005  
KR-8006  
MU-8, MU-10  
KK-2460  
Work table kit  
KN-FC22W01  
KR-2030  
AI board  
Damp heater kit  
MF-FC22U, MF-FC22E  
MANUAL FC31  
Operator’s manual  
(English, French, German, Spanish, Italian)  
Color copy guide  
GUIDE FC31  
(English, French, German, Spanish, Italian)  
4. Replacement Units/Supplies  
(1) Replacement units  
Electrophotographic processing unit (EPU)  
Transfer belt unit (TBU)  
EPU-FC31  
TR-BLT-FC31  
Fuser unit  
FUSER-FC31-115/127/200  
(2) Supplies  
TonerY (Yellow)  
Toner M (Magenta)  
Toner C (Cyan)  
Toner K (Black)  
Toner bag  
PS-ZTFC31Y, PS-ZTFC31EY  
PS-ZTFC31M, PS-ZTFC31EM  
PS-ZTFC31C, PS-ZTFC31EC  
PS-ZTFC31K, PS-ZTFC31EK  
PS-TBFC22, PS-TBFC22E  
FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
A - 6  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System List  
February 2002 © TOSHIBA TEC  
A - 7  
FC-210/310 SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam CD Player CD 601MKII User Manual
Tasco Digital Camera 119215C User Manual
Toshiba DVD VCR Combo D KR2SU User Manual
Trane Heat Pump 4TWA3 User Manual
Tripp Lite Computer Monitor SUPDU001 User Manual
Tripp Lite Network Cables N002 010 BK User Manual
Uniden Two Way Radio PRO 640XL User Manual
United States Stove Remote Starter 5500 User Manual
Vantec Network Card UGT CR955 BK User Manual
ViewSonic Car Video System VX1945wm User Manual